Nixon Camcorder D2xs User Manual

The Nikon Guide to Digital Photography

with the

DIGITAL CAMERA

How to Read This Manual

First, be aware of the warnings, cautions, and notices on pages ii–vii.

Then read “Overview” and “Getting to Know the

Camera” to acquaint yourself with the conventions

used in this manual and the names of camera parts,

then set up the camera as described in “First Steps.”

Overview

Getting to Know the Camera

First Steps

Basic Photography

Basic Playback

Now you are ready to take photographs and play

them back.

High-Speed Crop

Choosing a Shooting Mode

Image Quality and Size

ISO Sensitivity

White Balance

Image Adjustment

Focus

Once you have mastered the basics of digital pho-

tography, you can read these sections for complete

information on when and how to use camera

controls.

Exposure

Flash Photography

Overlay/Multiple Exposure

Trimming Photographs

Interval Timer Photography

Self-Timer Mode

Non-CPU Lenses

Using a GPS Unit

Two-Button Reset

More About Playback

Voice Memos

Refer to these chapters for more on playback…

…on recording and playing voice memos…

…on camera menus and custom settings…

…on connecting to a computer, printer, or TV…

…and on accessories and troubleshooting.

Menu Guide

Connections

Technical Notes

For Your Safety

To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others,

read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equip-

ment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product

will read them.

The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions

listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:

This icon marks warnings, information that should be read before using this

Nikon product to prevent possible injury.

WARNINGS

Do not look at the sun through the view-

ﬁnder

Do not disassemble

Touching the internal parts of the camera

or quick charger could result in injury. In

the event of a malfunction, the product

should be repaired only by a qualiﬁed tech-

nician. Should the product break open

as the result of a fall or other accident,

remove the battery and/or AC adapter and

then take the product to a Nikon-autho-

rized service center for inspection.

Viewing the sun or other strong light

source through the viewﬁnder could

cause permanent visual impairment.

Turn off immediately in the event of

malfunction

Should you notice smoke or an unusual

smell coming from the equipment,

quick charger, or AC adapter (available

separately), unplug the AC adapter

and remove the battery immediately,

taking care to avoid burns. Continued

operation could result in injury. After

removing the battery, take the equipment

to a Nikon-authorized service center for

inspection.

Observe proper precautions when han-

dling batteries

Batteries may leak or explode if im-

properly handled. Observe the following

precautions when handling batteries for

use in this product:

• Be sure the product is off before re-

placing batteries. If you are using an

AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.

• Use only batteries approved for use in

this equipment.

• Use only CR1616 lithium batteries to re-

place the clock battery. Using another

type of battery could cause an explosion.

Dispose of used batteries as directed.

• Do not attempt to insert batteries upside

down or backwards.

Do not use in the presence of ﬂam-

mable gas

Do not use electronic equipment in the

presence of ﬂammable gas, as this could

result in explosion or ﬁre.

Do not place strap around the neck of

an infant or child

Placing the camera strap around the

neck of an infant or child could result

in strangulation.

• Do not short or disassemble batteries.

• Do not expose batteries to ﬂame or to

excessive heat.

• Do not immerse in or expose to water.

• Batteries are prone to leakage when

fully discharged. To avoid damage to

the product, be sure to remove batteries

when no charge remains.

• Discontinue use immediately should you

notice any changes in the batteries, such

as discoloration or deformation.

• Replace the terminal cover when trans-

porting EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion bat-

teries. Do not transport or store with metal

objects such as necklaces or hairpins.

• When EN-EL4a batteries are not in use,

attach the terminal cover and store in a

cool place.

• Immediately after use, or when the

product is used on battery power for

an extended period, the EN-EL4a battery

may become hot. Before removing the

battery, turn the camera off and allow

the battery to cool.

Use appropriate cables

When connecting cables to the input and

output jacks, use only the cables pro-

vided or sold by Nikon for the purpose,

to maintain compliance with product

regulations.

Keep out of reach of children

Particular care should be taken to prevent

infants from putting the battery or other

small parts into their mouths.

Removing memory cards

Memory cards may become hot dur-

ing use. Observe due caution when

removing memory cards from the

camera.

CD-ROMs

The CD-ROMs on which the software

and manuals are distributed should not

be played back on audio CD equipment.

Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD player

could cause hearing loss or damage the

equipment.

Observe proper precautions when han-

dling the quick charger

Observe caution when using a ﬂash

Using a ﬂash close to your subject’s eyes

could cause temporary visual impairment.

Particular care should be observed if

photographing infants, when the ﬂash

should be no less than one meter (39˝)

from the subject.

• Keep dry. Failure to observe this precau-

tion could result in ﬁre or electric shock.

• Dust on or near the metal parts of the

plug should be removed with a dry cloth.

Continued use could result in ﬁre.

• Do not handle the power cable or go

near the charger during thunderstorms.

Failure to observe this precaution could

result in electric shock.

• Do not damage, modify, forcibly tug or

bend the power cable, place it under

heavy objects, or expose it to heat or

ﬂame. Should the insulation be dam-

aged and the wires become exposed,

take it to a Nikon-authorized service

representative for inspection. Failure to

observe these precautions could result

in ﬁre or electric shock.

When using the viewﬁnder

When operating the diopter adjustment

control with your eye to the viewﬁnder,

care should be taken not to put your

ﬁnger in your eye accidentally.

Avoid contact with liquid crystal

Should the monitor break, care should

be taken to avoid injury due to broken

glass and to prevent liquid crystal from

the monitor touching the skin or entering

the eyes or mouth.

• Do not handle the plug or charger with

wet hands. Failure to observe this pre-

caution could result in electric shock.

iii

Caring for the Camera and Battery

Do not drop

Handle all moving parts with care

The product may malfunction if subjected to Do not apply force to the battery-chamber,

strong shocks or vibration.

card-slot, or connector covers. These parts

are especially susceptible to damage.

Keep dry

This product is not waterproof, and may Cleaning

malfunction if immersed in water or exposed • When cleaning the camera body, use a

to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the

internal mechanism can cause irreparable

damage.

blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe

gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using

your camera at the beach or seaside, wipe

off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly

dampened with pure water and then dry

your camera thoroughly. In rare instances,

static electricity produced by a brush or

cloth may cause the LCD displays to light

up or darken. This does not indicate a

malfunction, and the display will shortly

return to normal.

Avoid sudden changes in temperature

Sudden changes in temperature, such as oc-

cur when entering or leaving a heated build-

ing on a cold day, can cause condensation

inside the device. To prevent condensation,

place the device in a carrying case or a plastic

bag before exposing it to sudden changes in

temperature.

• When cleaning the lens and mirror, re-

member that these elements are easily

damaged. Dust and lint should be gently

removed with a blower. When using an

aerosol blower, keep the can vertical (tilt-

ing the can could result in liquid being

sprayed on the mirror). If you do get a

ﬁngerprint or other stain on the lens, ap-

ply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft

cloth and wipe the lens carefully.

Keep away from strong magnetic ﬁelds

Do not use or store this device in the vicinity

of equipment that generates strong elec-

tromagnetic radiation or magnetic ﬁelds.

Strong static charges or the magnetic ﬁelds

produced by equipment such as radio trans-

mitters could interfere with the monitor,

damage data stored on the memory card, or

affect the product’s internal circuitry.

• See “Technical Notes: Caring for Your

Camera” for information on cleaning the

low-pass ﬁlter ( 256).

Do not point the lens at strong light sources

for extended periods

Avoid pointing the lens at the sun or other

strong light sources for extended periods Storage

when using or storing the camera. Intense • To prevent mold or mildew, store the cam-

light may cause deterioration in the image

sensor, producing a white blur effect in

photographs.

era in a dry, well-ventilated area. If you

will not be using the product for long pe-

riods, remove the battery to prevent leak-

age and store the camera in a plastic bag

containing a desiccant. Do not, however,

store the camera case in a plastic bag, as

this may cause the material to deteriorate.

Note that desiccant gradually loses its ca-

pacity to absorb moisture and should be

replaced at regular intervals.

Do not touch the shutter curtain

The shutter curtain is extremely thin and

easily damaged. Under no circumstances

should you exert pressure on the curtain,

poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to

powerful air currents from a blower. These

actions could scratch, deform, or tear the

curtain.

• Do not store the camera with naphtha or circumstances could result in loss of data or

camphor moth balls, close to equipment in damage to product memory or internal

that produces strong magnetic ﬁelds, or in circuitry. To prevent an accidental inter-

areas subject to extremes of temperature, ruption of power, avoid carrying the product

for example near a space heater or in a from one location to another while the AC

closed vehicle on a hot day.

adapter is connected.

• To prevent mold or mildew, take the cam-

era out of storage at least once a month.

Turn the camera on and release the shut-

ter a few times before putting the camera

away again.

• Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Re-

place the terminal cover before putting

the battery away.

Batteries

• When you turn the device on, check the

battery-level displayed in the control panel

to determine whether the battery needs

to be replaced. The battery needs to be

replaced when the battery-level indicator

is ﬂashing.

• Ready a spare battery and keep it fully

charged when taking photographs on im-

portant occasions. Depending on your lo-

cation, you may ﬁnd it difﬁcult to purchase

replacement batteries on short notice.

Notes on the monitor

• The monitor may contain a few pixels that

are always lit or that do not light. This is

a characteristic common to all TFT LCD

monitors and does not indicate a malfunc- • On cold days, the capacity of batteries

tion. Images recorded with the product

will not be affected.

• Images in the monitor may be difﬁcult to

see in a bright light.

• Do not apply pressure to the monitor; this

could cause damage or malfunction. Dust

tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is

fully charged before taking photographs

outside in cold weather. Keep a spare

battery in a warm place and exchange the

two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold

battery may recover some of its charge.

or lint on the monitor can be removed • Should the battery terminals become dirty,

with a blower. Stains can be removed

by rubbing the surface lightly with a soft

cloth or chamois leather.

• Should the monitor break, care should be

taken to avoid injury due to broken glass

and to prevent the liquid crystal from the

monitor touching the skin or entering the

eyes or mouth.

wipe them off with a clean, dry cloth be-

fore use.

• After removing the battery from the cam-

era, be sure to replace the terminal cover.

Memory cards

• Turn the power off before inserting or

removing memory cards. Inserting or

removing cards with the power on could

render them unusable.

• Insert memory cards as

shown in the illustration

• Replace the monitor cover when trans-

porting the camera or leaving it unat-

tended.

Turn the product off before removing or dis-

connecting the power source

at right. Inserting cards

upside down or back-

Do not unplug the product or remove the

battery while the product is on, or while

images are being recorded or deleted. Forc-

ibly cutting power to the product in these

wards could damage the

camera or the card.

Notices

• No part of the manuals included with this • Nikon will not be held liable for any damag-

product may be reproduced, transmitted,

es resulting from the use of this product.

transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or • While every effort has been made to ensure

translated into any language in any form,

by any means, without Nikon’s prior writ-

ten permission.

• Nikon reserves the right to change the

speciﬁcations of the hardware and soft-

ware described in these manuals at any

time and without prior notice.

that the information in these manuals is ac-

curate and complete, we would appreciate

it were you to bring any errors or omissions

to the attention of the Nikon representative

in your area (address provided separately).

Notice for customers in the U.S.A.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement

This equipment has been tested and found

D2Xs

to comply with the limits for a Class B digital

device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.

These limits are designed to provide reason-

able protection against harmful interference

in a residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre-

quency energy and, if not installed and used

in accordance with the instructions, may

cause harmful interference to radio commu-

nications. However, there is no guarantee

that interference will not occur in a particular

installation. If this equipment does cause

harmful interference to radio or television re-

ception, which can be determined by turning

the equipment off and on, the user is encour-

aged to try to correct the interference by one

or more of the following measures:

Tested To Comply

With FCC Standards

FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE

CAUTIONS

Modiﬁcations

The FCC requires the user to be notiﬁed

that any changes or modiﬁcations made to

this device that are not expressly approved

by Nikon Corporation may void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

Interface Cables

Use the interface cables sold or provided by

Nikon for your equipment. Using other inter-

face cables may exceed the limits of Class B

Part 15 of the FCC rules.

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equip- Notice for customers in the State of California

ment and receiver.

WARNING: Handling the cord on this product

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on will expose you to lead, a chemical known to

a circuit different from that to which the the State of California to cause birth defects

receiver is connected.

or other reproductive harm. Wash hands

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ after handling.

television technician for help.

Nikon Inc.,

1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York

11747-3064, U.S.A. Tel.: 631-547-4200

Notice for customers in Canada

CAUTION

ATTENTION

This class B digital apparatus meets all re- Cet appareil numérique de la classe B res-

quirements of the Canadian Interference pecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur

Causing Equipment Regulations.

le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction

Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced

by means of a scanner, digital camera or other device may be punishable by law.

• Items prohibited by law from being • Cautions on certain copies and repro-

copied or reproduced

ductions

Do not copy or reproduce paper money,

coins, securities, government bonds, or lo-

cal government bonds, even if such copies

or reproductions are stamped “Sample.”

The government has issued cautions on

copies or reproductions of securities issued

by private companies (shares, bills, checks,

gift certiﬁcates, etc.), commuter passes, or

coupon tickets, except when a minimum

of necessary copies are to be provided

for business use by a company. Also, do

not copy or reproduce passports issued by

the government, licenses issued by public

agencies and private groups, ID cards, and

tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.

The copying or reproduction of paper mon-

ey, coins, or securities which are circulated

in a foreign country is prohibited.

Unless the prior permission of the govern-

ment has been obtained, the copying or

reproduction of unused postage stamps

or post cards issued by the government is

prohibited.

• Comply with copyright notices

The copying or reproduction of copyrighted

creative works such as books, music, paint-

ings, woodcut prints, maps, drawings,

movies, and photographs is governed by

national and international copyright laws.

Do not use this product for the purpose of

making illegal copies or to infringe copy-

right laws.

The copying or reproduction of stamps is-

sued by the government and of certiﬁed

documents stipulated by law is prohibited.

Disposing of Data Storage Devices

Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices

does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted ﬁles can sometimes be recovered

from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting

in the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s

responsibility.

Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase

all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely reﬁll it

with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure

to also replace any pictures selected for preset white balance ( 60). Care should be taken

to avoid injury or damage to property when physically destroying data storage devices.

vii

Table of Contents

For Your Safety................................................................................................ ii

Caring for the Camera and Battery................................................................ iv

Notices.............................................................................................................. vi

Introduction

Overview..........................................................................................................

Getting to Know the Camera .........................................................................

First Steps......................................................................................................... 15

Step 1—Attach the Camera Strap .................................................................... 15

Step 2—Insert the Battery ................................................................................ 16

Step 3—Basic Setup ......................................................................................... 17

Step 4—Attach a Lens...................................................................................... 20

Step 5—Insert a Memory Card ......................................................................... 22

Tutorial

Basic Photography........................................................................................... 26

Step 1—Ready the Camera .............................................................................. 27

Step 2—Adjust Camera Settings....................................................................... 29

Step 3—Frame a Photograph ........................................................................... 31

Step 4—Focus.................................................................................................. 32

Step 5—Check Exposure .................................................................................. 33

Step 6—Take the Photograph........................................................................... 34

Basic Playback.................................................................................................. 35

Taking Photographs

Using Camera Menus ...................................................................................... 39

High-Speed Crop ............................................................................................. 41

Choosing a Shooting Mode ............................................................................ 43

Image Quality and Size ................................................................................... 45

Image Quality................................................................................................... 45

Image Size........................................................................................................ 48

ISO Sensitivity .................................................................................................. 52

White Balance.................................................................................................. 55

Fine-Tuning White Balance ............................................................................... 57

Choosing a Color Temperature......................................................................... 59

Preset White Balance........................................................................................ 60

Image Adjustment........................................................................................... 68

Making Edges More Distinct: Image Sharpening............................................... 68

Adjusting Contrast: Tone Compensation........................................................... 69

Suiting Colors to a Workﬂow: Color Space ....................................................... 70

Matching Colors to the Subject: Color Mode.................................................... 72

Controlling Color: Hue Adjustment .................................................................. 73

viii

Focus................................................................................................................. 74

Focus Mode ..................................................................................................... 74

Focus Area Selection ........................................................................................ 76

Autofocus ........................................................................................................ 78

AF-Area Mode.............................................................................................. 78

Focus Lock.................................................................................................... 82

Getting Good Results with Autofocus........................................................... 84

Manual Focus................................................................................................... 85

Exposure........................................................................................................... 86

Metering.......................................................................................................... 86

Exposure Mode ................................................................................................ 87

Autoexposure Lock........................................................................................... 97

Exposure Compensation................................................................................... 99

Bracketing........................................................................................................ 100

Flash Photography........................................................................................... 108

Compatible Flash Units..................................................................................... 108

Flash Sync Modes............................................................................................. 112

FV Lock ............................................................................................................ 114

Flash Contacts and Indicators ........................................................................... 116

Overlay/Multiple Exposure ............................................................................. 118

Trimming Photographs ................................................................................... 123

Interval Timer Photography............................................................................ 125

Self-Timer Mode.............................................................................................. 130

Non-CPU Lenses............................................................................................... 131

Using a GPS Unit.............................................................................................. 135

Two-Button Reset............................................................................................ 136

More About Playback

137

Single-Image Playback...................................................................................... 138

Photo Information............................................................................................ 139

Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback.................................................. 142

Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom ............................................................... 144

Protecting Photographs from Deletion.............................................................. 145

Deleting Individual Photographs ....................................................................... 146

Voice Memos

147

Recording Voice Memos................................................................................... 148

Playing Voice Memos........................................................................................ 152

Menu Guide

155

The Playback Menu ......................................................................................... 156

Delete .............................................................................................................. 156

Playback Folder ................................................................................................ 158

Slide Show ....................................................................................................... 159

Hide Image....................................................................................................... 161

Print Set ........................................................................................................... 163

Display Mode ................................................................................................... 166

Image Review................................................................................................... 166

After Delete ..................................................................................................... 167

Rotate Tall ........................................................................................................ 167

The Shooting Menu......................................................................................... 168

Shooting Menu Bank........................................................................................ 169

Reset Shooting Menu....................................................................................... 171

Active Folder .................................................................................................... 172

File Naming...................................................................................................... 173

Image Quality................................................................................................... 174

Image Size........................................................................................................ 174

Hi-Speed Crop.................................................................................................. 174

JPEG Compression............................................................................................ 174

RAW Compression ........................................................................................... 175

White Balance.................................................................................................. 175

Long Exp. NR.................................................................................................... 175

High ISO NR ..................................................................................................... 176

ISO Sensitivity................................................................................................... 176

Image Sharpening ............................................................................................ 176

Tone Compensation ......................................................................................... 176

Color Space...................................................................................................... 177

Color Mode...................................................................................................... 177

Hue Adjustment............................................................................................... 177

Image Overlay .................................................................................................. 177

Multiple Exposure............................................................................................. 177

Trim ................................................................................................................. 178

Interval Timer Shooting .................................................................................... 178

Non-CPU Lens Data.......................................................................................... 178

Custom Settings............................................................................................... 179

The Setup Menu .............................................................................................. 213

Format ............................................................................................................. 214

LCD Brightness................................................................................................. 215

Mirror Lock-up ................................................................................................. 215

Video Mode..................................................................................................... 216

World Time...................................................................................................... 216

Language......................................................................................................... 216

Image Comment .............................................................................................. 217

Auto Image Rotation........................................................................................ 218

Recent Settings ................................................................................................ 219

Voice Memo..................................................................................................... 219

Voice Memo Overwrite..................................................................................... 219

Voice Memo Button ......................................................................................... 220

Audio Output................................................................................................... 220

USB.................................................................................................................. 220

Dust Off Ref Photo........................................................................................... 221

Battery Info ...................................................................................................... 223

Wireless LAN.................................................................................................... 223

Image Authentication....................................................................................... 231

Save/Load Settings ........................................................................................... 232

Firmware Version.............................................................................................. 232

Connections

233

Television Playback.......................................................................................... 234

Connecting to a Computer ............................................................................. 235

Connecting to a Printer................................................................................... 238

Technical Notes

243

Optional Accessories ....................................................................................... 244

Lenses for the D2Xs.......................................................................................... 244

Other Accessories for the D2Xs ........................................................................ 247

Caring for the Camera .................................................................................... 253

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 258

Speciﬁcations................................................................................................... 261

Quick Charger/Rechargeable Battery ............................................................... 265

Index................................................................................................................. 271

Trademark Information

Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Microsoft

and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation.

CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation. Microdrive is a registered trademark of Hitachi Global Storage

Technologies in the United States and/or other countries. Lexar Media is a trademark of Lexar Media Corporation.

PictBridge is a trademark. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with

your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

xii

Introduction

Getting Started

This chapter is divided into the following sec-

tions:

Overview

Read this section for a description of how this

manual is organized and for an explanation of

the symbols and conventions used.

Getting to Know the Camera

Bookmark this section and refer to it for infor-

mation on the names and functions of camera

parts.

First Steps

This section details the steps required to ready

the camera for use: inserting the battery and

memory card, attaching a lens and camera strap,

and setting the date, time, and language.

Overview

About This Manual

Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon D2Xs single-lens reﬂex (SLR) digital

camera with interchangeable lenses. This manual has been written to help

you enjoy taking pictures with your Nikon digital camera. Read this manual

thoroughly before use, and keep it handy when using the product.

To make it easier to ﬁnd the information you need, the following symbols

and conventions are used:

This icon marks cautions, informa-

tion that should be read before use

to prevent damage to the camera.

This icon marks tips, additional in-

formation that may be helpful when

using the camera.

This icon marks notes, information

that should be read before using

the camera.

This icon indicates that more infor-

mation is available elsewhere in this

manual or in the Quick Start Guide.

This icon marks settings that can be

ﬁne-tuned from the Custom Set-

tings menu.

This icon marks settings that can be

adjusted using camera menus.

Take Test Shots

Before taking pictures on important occasions (for example, at weddings or before

taking the camera with you on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is

functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost proﬁts that may

result from product malfunction.

Life-Long Learning

As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and

education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:

• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/

• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support

• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/

Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers

to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and pho-

tography. Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in

your area. See the URL below for contact information:

http://nikonimaging.com/

Getting to Know the Camera

Camera Controls and Displays

Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and dis-

plays. You may ﬁnd it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you

read through the rest of the manual.

Camera Body

Metering selector:

Metering selector

lock button: 86

Exposure mode (

) button:

) button: 23

Format (

Bracketing (

)

button: 100, 105

Mode dial lock

Power switch:

Shutter-release

button: 32, 34

Exposure

compensation

) button:

release:

Mode dial:

Eyelet for

camera

strap:

(

Eyelet for

camera

strap:

Flash sync

mode (

button:

)

113

Top control

panel:

Diopter

adjustment

knob:

Accessory shoe:

116

Command lock (

button: 96

)

Focal plane mark

): 85

(

LCD Illuminators

Holding the power switch in the

position activates the exposure meters and control

panel backlights (LCD illuminators), allowing the display to be read in the dark. After

the power switch is released, the illuminator will remain lit while the camera exposure

meters are active or until the shutter is released.

Ambient light sensor:

55, 60

Camera Body (continued)

Self-timer lamp:

130

Flash sync terminal:

116

10-pin remote terminal:

251

Audio/video (A/V) connector

(under cover): 234

Housings for ﬂash

sync and 10-pin re-

mote terminal caps

(on inside of cover)

DC-in connector

(under cover):

247

USB connector (under cover):

236

Lens release button:

Focus-mode selector:

Battery cover latch:

Connector

for optional

wireless LAN

adapter (under

Depth-of-ﬁeld preview button:

cover):

247

Sub-command dial:

FUNC. button:

208

Sub-command

dial for vertical

shooting:

Shutter-release

button for vertical

shooting:

Vertical shooting shutter-

Tripod socket

release button lock:

31, 75

Eyepiece shutter lever:

Delete ( ) button: 35,

31, 130

Viewﬁnder eyepiece:

31, 248

AF-ON ( )button:

146

Format (

AE/AF lock (

button: 82, 97

)

) button:

)

Main command

dial: 12

Playback (

button:

138

Multi selector:

Monitor:

215, 253

28,

Focus selector

Menu (

button:

)

lock:

Memory card

access lamp:

22, 24

Thumbnail (

button:

)

142

AF-area mode

selector: 78

Protect (

button:

)

145

HELP button:

Memory card

slot cover:

Enter (

button:

)

Playback zoom

Card-slot cover

release button

(under cover):

( ) button:

144

Speaker:

153

Rear control panel:

ISO sensitivity (ISO)

button: 52

Image quality/size (QUAL)

Main command dial

for vertical shooting:

AF-ON ( ) button for vertical

shooting: 75

Microphone ( ) button:

button:

46, 49

White balance (WB)

button:

148

55–67

Microphone: 148

The Speaker and Microphone

Do not bring magnetic devices, such as microdrive cards, close to the built-in speaker

or microphone.

The Top Control Panel

1 Shutter speed ..........................87–96

Exposure compensation value....... 99

Number of shots in bracketing

sequence.................................... 100

Number of intervals for

14 FV lock indicator......................... 114

15 Sync indicator............................. 113

16 Clock battery indicator.......... 19, 255

17 GPS connection indicator............ 135

18 High-speed crop indicator............. 41

19 Exposure compensation indicator... 99

20 Interval timer indicator................ 127

21 Multiple exposure indicator......... 121

22 Aperture lock icon ........................ 96

23 Image comment indicator........... 217

24 Exposure bracketing indicator..... 100

White-balance bracketing

interval timer photography ......... 127

Focal length (non-CPU lens)........ 131

ISO sensitivity................................ 52

“Busy” indicator........................... 42

2 Shutter-speed lock icon................. 96

3 Flexible program indicator............. 89

4 Exposure mode............................. 87

5 Memory card indicator............ 23, 28

6 Focus area .................................... 76

AF-area mode..........................78–81

7 Flash sync mode ......................... 112

8 Number of exposures

indicator..................................... 105

25 Electronic analog exposure

display.......................................... 95

Exposure compensation................ 99

Bracketing progress

indicator..............................100–107

PC mode indicator...................... 236

remaining..................................... 28

Number of shots remaining

before memory buffer ﬁlls............. 44

Capture mode indicator.............. 236

9 Aperture stop indicator........... 93, 95

10 Aperture (f/-number) ...............87–96

Aperture (number of stops)..... 93, 95

Bracketing increment.......... 101, 105

Number of shots per interval....... 125

Maximum aperture

(non-CPU lens)............................ 133

PC mode indicator...................... 236

11 Battery indicator ........................... 27

12 Frame count ................................. 28

13 “K” (appears when memory remains

for over 1000 exposures) .............. 51

The Rear Control Panel

1 Custom settings bank................. 182

2 “Remaining” indicator.................. 28

3 Shooting menu settings bank ..... 169

4 ISO sensitivity indicator ................. 52

Auto ISO sensitivity indicator....... 191

5 ISO sensitivity................................ 52

ISO sensitivity (high gain) .............. 52

Number of exposures

remaining..................................... 28

Length of voice memo................ 149

White balance ﬁne-tuning ............ 57

White balance preset number....... 60

Color temperature........................ 59

PC mode indicator...................... 236

6 “K” (appears when memory remains

for over 1000 exposures) .............. 51

Color temperature indicator.......... 59

7 Image quality................................ 45

8 Image size .................................... 48

9 White-balance bracketing

indicator..................................... 105

10 Voice memo recording indicator

(shooting mode) ......................... 149

11 Voice memo status indicator....... 149

12 Voice memo recording mode ...... 150

13 White balance mode..................... 55

The Viewﬁnder Display

10 11

14 15

17 18 19

The High Speed Crop

When On is selected for High-speed crop, the high-

speed crop is shown by the transparent area in the

viewﬁnder.

High-speed crop

1 8-mm (0.31in.) reference circle for

center-weighted metering............. 85

2 Focus brackets (focus areas).......... 76

Spot metering targets................... 86

3 Focus indicator ....................... 32, 85

4 Metering ...................................... 86

5 Bracketing indicator.................... 100

6 Autoexposure (AE) lock................. 97

7 Black-and-white indicator ............. 72

8 Shutter-speed lock icon................. 96

9 Shutter speed ..........................87–96

10 Aperture lock icon ........................ 96

11 Aperture (f/-number) ...............87–96

Aperture (number of stops)..... 93, 95

12 Exposure mode............................. 87

13 Exposure compensation indicator.. 99

15 “K” (appears when memory remains

for over 1000 exposures) .............. 51

16 Flash-ready indicator................... 116

17 Battery indicator ........................... 27

18 FV lock indicator......................... 114

19 Sync indicator............................. 113

20 Aperture stop indicator........... 93, 95

21 Electronic analog exposure

display.......................................... 95

Exposure compensation................ 99

22 Voice memo status indicator....... 149

23 White-balance bracketing

indicator..................................... 105

24 White-balance mode .................... 51

25 Image size .................................... 48

26 Image quality................................ 45

27 ISO sensitivity indicator ................. 52

Auto ISO sensitivity indicator....... 191

28 ISO sensitivity................................ 52

14 Frame count ................................. 28

Number of exposures

remaining..................................... 28

Number of shots remaining

before memory buffer ﬁlls............. 44

Exposure compensation value....... 99

PC mode indicator...................... 236

No Battery

When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the display in the view-

ﬁnder will dim. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. The viewﬁnder

display will return to normal when a fully-charged battery is inserted.

The Command Dials

The main- and sub-command dials are used alone or in combination with

other controls to adjust a variety of settings. For ease of access when taking

photographs in tall (portrait) orientation, dials that duplicate the functions

of the main and sub-command dials have been placed close to the shutter-

release button for vertical shooting ( 31).

Image

quality/size

button

Sub-command dial

Bracketing

button

Exposure

mode button

Exposure

compensation

button

Flash sync

mode button

Command

lock button

ISO

White

sensitivity balance

button button

Main command dial

Image quality and size

Set image quality ( 45).

Choose an image size ( 48).

White balance

Choose a white balance setting ( 55).

Fine-tune white balance/choose a color

temperature/choose a white balance preset

(

56, 59, 60).

ISO sensitivity

Set ISO sensitivity ( 52).

Exposure

Choose the exposure mode ( 87–95).

Choose a combination of aperture and

shutter speed (exposure mode P;

89).

Choose a shutter speed (exposure mode S

or M; 90, 94).

Choose an aperture (exposure mode A or

M; 92, 94).

Set exposure compensation ( 99).

Shutter speed lock (exposure mode S or

96).

Aperture lock (exposure mode A or M;

96).

Activate or cancel bracketing/select num-

ber of shots in bracketing sequence (

100, 105).

Select bracketing exposure increment (

101, 105).

Flash settings

Choose a ﬂash sync mode for optional

Speedlight ( 112).

The Multi Selector

The multi selector is used for the following operations:

• Menu navigation: Move highlight bar up ( 40).

• Help: Scroll up ( 39).

• Shooting: Select focus area above current focus

area ( 76).

• Full-frame playback: Display previous image (

35).

• Thumbnail playback: Highlight thumbnail above

• Menu navigation: Select

highlighted item ( 40).

• Shooting: Select center focus

area ( 76).

• Playback: Change number of

images displayed ( 142).

current thumbnail ( 142).

• Menu navigation: Cancel

and return to previous menu

(

40).

• Shooting:Select focus area to

left of current focus area (

76).

• Full-frame playback: Display

previous page of photo in-

formation ( 139).

• Thumbnail playback:High-

light thumbnail to left of

current thumbnail ( 142).

• Menu navigation: Select

highlighted item or display

sub-menu ( 40).

• Shooting: Select focus area

to right of current focus area

(

76).

• Full-frame playback: Display

next page of photo infor-

mation ( 139).

• Thumbnail playback: High-

light thumbnail to right of

current thumbnail ( 142).

• Menu navigation: Move highlight bar down ( 40).

• Help: Scroll down ( 39).

• Shooting: Select focus area below current focus

area ( 76).

• Full-frame playback: Display next image ( 35).

• Thumbnail playback: Highlight thumbnail below

current thumbnail ( 142).

The Multi Selector

The button can also be used to select items highlighted in the camera menus. There

may be some cases in which the operations listed on this page do not apply.

First Steps

Getting the Camera Ready for Use

Before using the camera for the ﬁrst time, complete the following steps:

Step 1 Attach the Camera Strap................................................................

Step 2 Insert the Battery ...........................................................................

For more information on batteries and alternative power sources, see:

•Technical Notes: Optional Accessories.................................................

•Caring for the Camera and Battery .....................................................

247

iv–v

Step 3 Basic Setup.....................................................................................

17–19

For information on changing the clock battery, see:

•Technical Notes: Caring for Your Camera ............................................

255

Step 4 Attach a Lens..................................................................................

20–21

To learn more about the lenses available for the D2Xs, see:

•Technical Notes: Optional Accessories.................................................

244–246

Step 5 Insert a Memory Card.....................................................................

22–24

To learn more about compatible memory cards, see:

•Technical Notes: Approved Memory Cards..........................................

For more information on formatting memory cards, see:

•The Setup Menu: Formatting Memory Cards.......................................

252

214

Step 1—Attach the Camera Strap

Attach the camera strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera body as

shown below.

Step 2—Insert the Battery

The D2Xs can be used with the supplied rechargeable Nikon EN-EL4a Li-ion

battery or an optional EN-EL4 battery.

.1 Charge the battery

The EN-EL4a is not fully charged at shipment. To maximize shooting

time, charge the battery in the supplied MH-21 quick charger before

use ( 266). About 145 minutes are required to fully recharge the

battery when no charge remains.

.2 Turn the camera off

Turn the camera off before inserting or re-

moving batteries.

.3 Remove the battery-chamber cover

Turn the battery-chamber cover latch to the

open position ( ) and remove the battery-

chamber cover.

.4 Attach the battery cover to the battery

The battery can be charged with the cover

attached.

.5 Insert the battery

Insert the battery as shown at right.

.6 Latch the battery-chamber cover

To prevent the battery from being dislodged

during operation, be sure the cover is se-

curely latched.

Removing the Battery

Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and rotate the battery-chamber cover

latch to the open position ( ).

EN-EL4a Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries

The EN-EL4a shares information with compatible devices, enabling the camera to show

battery charge state in six levels and the MH-21 to both display the current level and

charge the battery appropriately. The Battery info option in the setup menu details

battery charge, battery life, and the number of pictures taken ( 223).

Step 3—Basic Setup

Choose a language and set the time and date as described below.

Turn camera on.

Display menus.^*

*If option is highlighted, press multi selector to left until icon at left of menu is se-

lected.

Display SET UP menu.

Highlight Language.

Highlight option.

Position cursor in SET UP menu.

Display options.

Return to SET UP menu.

.10

.12

Highlight World time.

Highlight Time zone.

Select local time zone.^†

Display options.

.11

.13

Display map of world time zones.

.14

Return to WORLD TIME menu.^‡

†UTC ﬁeld shows time difference between selected time zone and Coordinated Uni-

versal Time (UTC), in hours.

‡If daylight saving time is in effect in local time zone, highlight Daylight saving time

and press multi selector to right. Press multi selector down to highlight On and press

multi selector right. Time will automatically be advanced one hour.

.15

.16

Highlight Date.

Display DATE menu.

.17

.18

Edit Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute,

and Second. Press multi selector left

or right to select item, up or down to

change. Press

button to set date

and time and return to to WORLD

TIME menu.

.19

Highlight Date format.

Display options.

.20

.21

Choose order in which date is listed.

Return to WORLD TIME menu.

The camera clock is less accurate than

most watches and household clocks.

Check the clock regularly against

more accurate time pieces and reset

as necessary. The clock can be reset

using the World time option in the

setup menu ( 213).

.22

Return to SET UP menu.

The Clock Battery

The clock-calendar is powered by a separate, non-rechargeable CR1616 lithium bat-

tery with a life of about four years. When this battery is exhausted, a icon will

be displayed in the top control panel while the exposure meters are on. For infor-

mation on replacing the clock battery, see “Technical Notes: Caring for the Camera”

(

255).

Step 4—Attach a Lens

Nikon recommends using a type G or type D CPU lens to take full advantage

of the features the camera offers.

CPU lenses have CPU

contacts

Type G lens

Type D lens

.1 Turn the camera off

Turn the camera off before attaching or

removing lenses.

.2 Attach a lens

Keeping the mounting mark on the lens

aligned with the mounting mark on the

camera body, position the lens in the cam-

era’s bayonet mount. Being careful not to

press the lens-release button, rotate the lens

counter-clockwise until it clicks into place.

.3 Lock aperture at the minimum setting

This step is not necessary if you are using a

type G lens not equipped with an aperture

ring. If you are using a lens of another type,

lock aperture at the minimum setting (high-

est f/-number).

If this step is omitted when attaching a CPU

lens, the aperture displays in the control

panel and viewﬁnder will show a blinking

when the camera is turned on. Photo-

graphs can not be taken until the camera is

turned off and aperture locked at the high-

est f/-number.

Protect the Camera from Dirt and Dust

Any dust, dirt, or other foreign matter inside your

camera could show up as specks or blotches in your

photographs or the viewﬁnder display. When no lens is

in place, keep the lens mount covered with the supplied

BF-1A body cap . When exchanging lens or replacing

the body cap, keep the lens mount pointed down.

Detaching the Lens

Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging

lenses. To remove the lens, press and hold the lens-re-

lease button while turning the lens clockwise.

Step 5—Insert a Memory Card

In place of ﬁlm, the D2Xs uses CompactFlash memory cards or microdrive

cards to store photographs. For a list of approved memory cards, see “Tech-

nical Notes: Approved Memory Cards” ( 252).

.1 Turn the camera off

Turn the camera off before inserting or re-

moving memory cards.

.2 Open the card slot cover

Open the door protecting the card-slot cov-

ቢ

er release button ( ) and press the release

ባ

ቤ

button ( ) to open the card slot ( ).

Direction of

insertion

.3 Insert a memory card

Insert the memory card with the rear label

Rear

label

ቢ

toward the monitor ( ). When the mem-

ory card is fully inserted, the green access

lamp will light and the eject button will pop

Terminals

ባ

up ( ). Close the card slot cover.

Inserting Memory Cards

Insert the memory card terminals ﬁrst. In-

serting the card upside down or backwards

could damage the camera or the card.

Check to be sure that the card is in the cor-

rect orientation.

No Memory Card

If no memory card is inserted in the camera when a

charged EN-EL4a battery is inserted or the camera is

will appear in the

exposure-count displays in the control panel and view-

ﬁnder.

.4 Format the memory card

Memory cards must be formatted before ﬁrst use.

Formatting Memory Cards

Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they

may contain. Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you

wish to keep to a computer before proceeding ( 235–238).

To format the card, turn the camera on and hold the

buttons down simultaneously for approximately two seconds. A blink-

ing will appear in the shutter-speed display and the frame count

(

and

)

will blink. Pressing both buttons together a second time will format

the memory card. Press any other button to exit without formatting.

During formatting, the letters

will appear in the frame-count dis-

play. When formatting is complete, the frame-count display will show

the number of photographs that can be recorded at current settings.

During Formatting

Do not remove the card or battery or unplug the AC adapter

(available separately) during formatting.

Format ( 214)

Memory cards can also be formatted using the Format option in the setup menu.

Memory Cards

• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory

cards from the camera.

• Format memory cards before ﬁrst use.

• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove

memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the

power source during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied

to a computer. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in

damage to the camera or card.

• Do not touch the card terminals with your ﬁngers or metal objects.

• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could dam-

age the card.

• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.

• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.

Removing Memory Cards

Memory cards can be removed without loss of data

when the camera is off. Before removing the memory

card, wait for the green card access lamp next to the

card slot cover to go out and then turn the camera

off. Do ^NOTattempt to remove the card while the

access lamp is on. Failure to observe this precaution

could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera

or card. Open the door protecting the card-slot cover

release button and press the release button to open the

card slot, then press the eject button to partially eject

Access lamp

ቢ

the card ( ). The card can then be removed by hand

ባ

(

). Do not push on the memory card while pressing

the eject button. Failure to observe this precaution

could damage the memory card.

Tutorial

Basic Photography and Playback

This chapter takes you step-by-step through the

process of taking your ﬁrst photographs and

playing them back.

Basic Photography

This section describes how to use autofocus

and programmed auto autoexposure for simple,

“point-and-shoot” photography that will pro-

duce optimal results in most situations.

Basic Playback

Read this section for information on viewing pho-

tographs in the monitor.

Basic Photography

Taking Your First Photographs

There are six basic steps to taking photographs:

Step 1 Ready the Camera ..........................................................................

27–28

To learn how to restore settings to their default values, see:

•Taking Photographs: Two-Button Reset...............................................

•Menu Guide: The Shooting Menu—Reset Shooting Menu..................

•Menu Guide: The Custom Settings Menu—Menu Reset .....................

136

171

183–184

Step 2 Adjust Camera Settings..................................................................

29–30

To learn more about the following camera settings, see:

•Taking Photographs: Choosing a Shooting Mode................................

•Taking Photographs: Image Quality and Size ......................................

•Taking Photographs: ISO Sensitivity....................................................

•Taking Photographs: White Balance....................................................

•Taking Photographs: Image Adjustment..............................................

•Taking Photographs: Focus..................................................................

•Taking Photographs: Exposure............................................................

43–44

45–51

52–53

55–67

68–73

74–85

86–107

Step 3 Frame the Photograph ...................................................................

To learn how to preview the effects of aperture, see:

•Taking Photographs: Exposure............................................................

To learn about optional viewﬁnder accessories, see:

•Technical Notes: Optional Accessories.................................................

248

Step 4 Focus...............................................................................................

To learn more about focus options, see:

•Taking Photographs: Focus..................................................................

74–85

Step 5 Check Exposure ..............................................................................

To learn how to change the composition after setting exposure, see:

•Taking Photographs: Exposure............................................................

To learn more about ﬂash photography, see:

•Taking Photographs: Flash Photography.............................................

108–117

Step 6 Take the Photograph......................................................................

For information on time-lapse photography, cropping, delaying shutter re-

lease, image overlay, and multiple exposure, see:

•Taking Photographs: Overlay/Multiple Exposure.................................

•Taking Photographs: Trimming Photographs.......................................

•Taking Photographs: Interval Timer Photography................................

•Taking Photographs: Self-Timer Mode.................................................

118–122

123–124

125–129

130

Step 1—Ready the Camera

Before taking photographs, ready the camera as described below.

.1 Turn the camera on

The control panel will turn on and the dis-

play in the viewﬁnder will light.

.2 Check the battery level

Check the battery level in the viewﬁnder or

top control panel.

Icon^*

Control View-

panel ﬁnder

Status

Notes

Battery fully

charged

Aperture and shutter-speed indicators in top

control panel and all indicators in viewﬁnder

turn off if no operations are performed for 6s

(auto meter off). Press shutter-release button

halfway to reactivate display.

—

Battery

partially

discharged

Low battery Ready fully-charged spare battery.

Battery

Shutter release disabled.

(ﬂashes) (ﬂashes) exhausted

*No icon displayed when camera powered by optional AC adapter.

The Battery Indicator

If the segments in the control panel battery icon blink on and off, the camera is calcu-

lating the battery charge. The battery level will be displayed in about three seconds.

The

Icon

icon in the control panel indicates that the battery has malfunctioned

icon in the viewﬁnder may also

ﬂash). Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative.

A ﬂashing

or is otherwise unsuitable for use in the D2Xs (the

.3 Check the number of exposures remaining

The exposure-count display in the top con-

trol panel shows the number of photographs

that can be taken at current settings. When

this number reaches zero, the

icon will

ﬂash in the top control panel and a ﬂashing

icon will appear in the viewﬁnder. No

further pictures can be taken until you de-

lete pictures or insert a new memory card.

You may be able to take additional pictures

at lower image quality or size settings.

The Monitor Cover

A clear plastic cover (the BM-3 LCD monitor cover) is

provided with the camera to keep the monitor clean,

and to protect the monitor when the camera is not in

use or when you are transporting the camera. To re-

move the monitor cover, hold the camera ﬁrmly, take

the cover by its edges, and pull the bottom of the cover

ቢ

gently outwards as shown at right ( ). Once the cover

is unlatched, you can move it slightly away from the

ባ

monitor and then remove it as shown ( ).

To replace the cover for shooting or storage, insert the

two projections on the top of the cover into the match-

ቢ

ing indentations above the camera monitor ( ), then

press the bottom of the cover until you hear it click into

ባ

place ( ).

Camera Off Display

If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory

card inserted, the frame count and number of exposures

remaining will be displayed (some memory cards may

only display this information when the camera is on).

Step 2—Adjust Camera Settings

This tutorial describes how to take photographs at the default settings listed

in the table below, using a type G or D lens. Information on when and how

to change settings from their default values is provided in “Taking Photo-

graphs” ( 37).

Image size White balance

Exposure mode

Rear

control

panel

Focus area

Top control panel

ISO sensitivity Image quality

Description

Option

Default

Pictures are compressed for balance between

image quality and ﬁle size that is ideal for

snapshots.

Image

quality

NORM

(JPEG Normal)

45–

Image

size

48–

Images are 4,288×2,848 pixels in size.

(Large)

Sensitivity (digital equivalent of ﬁlm speed) 52–

set to value roughly equivalent to ISO 100. 53

ISO

sensitivity

100

White

White balance is adjusted automatically for 55–

balance

(Auto)

natural colors under most types of lighting.

Built-in exposure program automatically ad-

justs shutter speed and aperture for optimal

exposure in most situations.

Exposure

mode (Programmed auto)

87–

Focus

Camera focuses on subject in center focus

area.

Center focus area

area

.1 Set the shooting mode to single frame ( 43)

ቢ

)

Hold the mode-dial lock release down (

ባ

and turn the shooting mode dial ( ) to S

(single frame). At this setting, the camera

will take one photograph each time the

shutter-release button is pressed.

.2 Choose single-area AF ( 78)

Rotate the AF-area mode selector until it

clicks into place pointing to

(single-area

AF). At this setting, the user can choose

from eleven focus areas. Pressing the shut-

ter-release button halfway locks focus at

the distance to the subject in the selected

focus area.

.3 Choose single-servo autofocus ( 74)

Rotate the focus-mode selector until it

clicks into place pointing to S (single-servo

autofocus). At this setting, the camera

will automatically focus on the subject in

the selected focus area when the shutter-

release button is pressed halfway. Pictures

can only be taken when the camera is in

focus.

.4 Choose matrix metering ( 86)

Press the metering selector lock button

and rotate the metering selector to

(matrix metering). Matrix metering uses

information from all areas of the frame to

determine exposure, ensuring optimal re-

sults for the entire frame. If a type G or D

lens is mounted on the camera, 3D matrix

metering II is used for exposure control that

takes into account maximum brightness,

contrast, and the distance to the subject.

When matrix metering is selected, the metering display in the view-

ﬁnder shows

Step 3—Frame a Photograph

To prevent blurred photographs caused by unsteady hands (camera shake),

hold the camera steadily in both hands, with your elbows propped lightly

against your torso for support. Hold the handgrip in your right hand and

cradle the camera body or lens with your left.

The shutter-release button

for vertical shooting ( 4)

can be used when taking

photographs in portrait

(tall) orientation.

The recommended stance for taking photographs is with one foot a half pace

in front of the other and your upper body stable.

Viewﬁnder Focus

The viewﬁnder is equipped with diopter adjustment to

accommodate individual differences in vision. To adjust

viewﬁnder focus, pull the diopter adjustment knob out

ቢ

(

) and rotate it until the viewﬁnder display and focus

ባ

brackets are in sharp focus ( ). When operating the

diopter adjustment knob with your eye to the view-

ﬁnder, be careful not to put your ﬁngers or ﬁngernails

in your eye.

Diopter can be adjusted in the range –3m^–1to +1m^–1. Corrective lenses (available

separately;

248) allow diopters of –6m^–1to +3m^–1.

Attaching Diopter Adjustment Viewﬁnder Lenses

Before attaching a diopter-adjustment viewﬁnder lens,

remove the DK-17 viewﬁnder eyepiece by closing the

ቢ

viewﬁnder shutter to release the eyepiece lock ( ) and

ባ

then unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right ( ).

Step 4—Focus

In single-servo AF, the camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus

area when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. After centering the

focus brackets on your subject, press the shutter-release button halfway and

check focus in the viewﬁnder.

Viewﬁnder display

Description

Subject in focus.

●

Focus point is between camera and subject.

Focus point is behind subject.

Camera unable to focus on subject in focus brackets using

autofocus.

(ﬂashes)

To focus on an off-center subject, use focus lock ( 82–83) or select the

focus area containing your subject using the multi selector ( 76). For infor-

mation on what to do if the camera is unable to focus using autofocus, see

“Getting Good Results with Autofocus” ( 84).

Step 5—Check Exposure

In exposure mode P (programmed auto), the cam-

era automatically sets shutter speed and aperture

when the shutter-release button is pressed half-

way. Before shooting, check the shutter-speed

and aperture indicators in the viewﬁnder. If the

photo would be under- or over-exposed at cur-

rent settings, one of the following indicators will

appear in either the shutter-speed or aperture

display.

Indicator

Description

Photo will be overexposed. Use optional Neutral Density (ND) ﬁlter.

Photo will be underexposed. Raise ISO sensitivity ( 52–53) or use op-

tional Speedlight ( 108).

Shutter Speed and Camera Shake

To prevent blurring caused by camera shake, the shutter speed should be faster than

the inverse of the focal length of the lens, in seconds (for example, if a lens has a focal

length of 50mm, shutter speed should be faster than ¹/60 s). Use of a tripod is recom-

mended when shooting at slower shutter speeds. To prevent blur, try increasing ISO

sensitivity ( 52–53) or using a VR lens. An optional Speedlight ( 108) can be used

to prevent blur at shutter speeds of ¹/60 s or slower.

Step 6—Take the Photograph

Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest

of the way down.

While the photograph is being recorded to the

memory card, the access lamp next to the card

slot cover will light. Do not eject the memory

card, turn the camera off, or remove or dis-

connect the power source until the lamp has

gone out. Removing the memory card or cutting

power in these circumstances could result in loss

of data.

Do Not Photograph Strong Light Sources

Avoid taking pictures with the camera focused on the sun or other strong light source.

Intense light may cause deterioration in the image sensor the camera uses in place of

ﬁlm. It may also produce a white blur effect in photographs.

Rotate Tall ( 167)

This playback menu option controls whether portrait-orientation photographs taken

with On selected for the Auto image rotation option in the setup menu are auto-

matically rotated during playback.

Image Review ( 166)

Photographs can be viewed at any time during or after recording by pressing the

button. When On is selected for the Image review option in the playback menu,

photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting.

Basic Playback

Viewing Photographs

To play photographs back, press the button. The most recent photograph

will be displayed in the monitor.

Viewing Additional Photographs

To page through photographs in the order recorded, press the multi selector

down. Press the multi selector up to view photographs in reverse order. To

scroll rapidly through the images on the memory card, press and hold the up

or down buttons on the multi selector.

When the last photograph on the memory card is displayed, you can return

to the ﬁrst photograph by pressing the multi selector down. When the ﬁrst

photograph in memory is displayed, you can view the last photograph by

pressing the multi selector up.

Deleting Unwanted Photographs

To delete the photograph currently

displayed in the monitor, press the

button. A conﬁrmation dialog will be

displayed. Press the

button again

to delete the image and return to

playback. To exit without deleting the

picture, press the multi selector left or

right.

Take Additional Photographs

To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the

the shutter-release button halfway.

button or press

Delete ( 156)

To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu.

Taking

Photographs

The Details

“Tutorial: Basic Photography” described the ba-

sic order of operations for taking photographs at

the most commonly-used settings. This chapter

explains how and when to adjust camera settings

for different shooting conditions.

The chart below shows the basic order for adjusting settings when taking

photographs. Before proceeding, be sure to read “Using Camera Menus”

(

39) for information on menu operations.

Will this be a single photo, or a series of photos?

High-Speed Crop .....................................................................

Choosing a Shooting Mode......................................................

41–42

43–44

How will this photograph be used?

Image Quality and Size ............................................................

Image Adjustment ...................................................................

45–51

68–73

What lighting is available?

ISO Sensitivity.........................................................................

White Balance .........................................................................

52–54

55–67

What is the subject, and how will I compose the photograph?

Focus ......................................................................................

74–85

How important is background lighting to the photograph?

Exposure: Metering .................................................................

What is more important, shutter speed or aperture?

Exposure: Exposure Mode ........................................................

87–95

Is the subject very bright, very dark, or high contrast?

Exposure: Exposure Compensation ...........................................

Exposure: Bracketing ............................................................... 100–107

Will I need a ﬂash?

Flash Photography................................................................... 108–117

Will I need the following advanced options?

Overlay/Multiple Exposure....................................................... 118–122

Trimming Photographs............................................................. 123–124

How do I want to control the shutter?

Interval Timer Photography...................................................... 125–129

Self-Timer Mode......................................................................

130

Using Camera Menus

Basic Menu Operations

The next four sections involve settings that can be

accessed via the camera menus. To view the menus,

turn the camera on and press the

button.

Choosing a Menu

There are ﬁve main menus: the playback menu,

the shooting menu, the Custom Settings menu,

the setup menu, and Recent Settings. When the

menu button is pressed, the camera displays the

last menu used. To select a different menu:

If menu item is highlighted, press

Select menu.

Position cursor in selected menu.

Recent Settings

The Recent Settings ( ) menu lists the eight most re-

cently selected items in the shooting and Custom Set-

tings menus. The Recent settings option ( 219) in

the setup menu can be used to lock the menu or delete

items to customize the menu.

Help

For help on menu options, press the

button. A de-

scription of the currently selected option or menu will

be displayed. Press the multi selector up or down to

scroll the display.

Making a Selection

To modify settings for an item in the current menu:

Highlight menu item.

Display options.

Highlight option.

Make selection.

• To return to the previous menu without making a selection, press the multi

selector to the left.

• The selection for some options is made from a sub-menu. Repeat steps 3

and 4 to make a selection from a sub-menu.

• Some menu items are not available while images are being recorded to the

memory card.

• Pressing the

button or the center of the multi selector performs the

same function as pressing the multi selector to the right. In some cases,

a selection can only be made using

selector.

button or the center of the multi

Exiting the Menus

To exit the menus, press the

the button twice). You can also exit the menus by pressing the

button (if a menu option is highlighted, press

button

to exit to playback mode or by turning the camera off. To exit the menus

and focus the camera for the next shot, press the shutter-release button

halfway.

High-Speed Crop

High-Speed Frame Advance

When high-speed crop is on, photographs will

include only the area framed in the viewﬁnder

high-speed crop (see right). Photographs can be

recorded at up to eight frames per second, and

more photographs can be taken before the memory

buffer ﬁlls ( 43).

High-speed crop

High-speed crop is turned on and off using the

FUNC. button or the Hi-speed crop item in the

shooting menu.

Option

Description

High-speed crop off. Photographs include entire area visible in view-

Off

(default) ﬁnder.

High-speed crop on. High-speed crop is dis-

played in viewﬁnder and high-speed crop indi-

cator is displayed in top control panel.

The Hi-Speed Crop Menu

Highlight Hi-speed crop in the shooting

menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to

the right.

Highlight the desired option and press the

multi selector to the right. The shooting menu

will be displayed.

Focus Areas

The two focus areas outside the high-speed crop are not available when high-speed

crop is on ( 76).

Image Size

Selecting high-speed crop reduces image size ( 48).

The FUNC. Button

Select Hi-speed crop for Custom Setting f5

(FUNC. + command;

209).

Press the FUNC. button and rotate the main

command dial until the high-speed crop indi-

cator is displayed in the top control panel.

The Viewﬁnder Crop Display

The brightness of the area outside the high-speed crop varies with aperture.

“Busy”

If high-speed crop is turned on or off while pictures are

being recorded to the memory card,

will ﬂash in

the top control panel and no photographs can be taken

until all pictures have been recorded or the original high-

speed crop setting has been restored.

Camera Off Display

If high-speed crop is on when the camera is turned off,

the high-speed crop indicator will be displayed in the

top control panel.

Choosing a Shooting Mode

Single Frame, Continuous, Self-Timer, or Mirror Up

Shooting mode determines how the camera takes photographs: one at a

time, in a continuous sequence, with a timed shutter-release delay, or with

the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize vibration.

Mode

Description

Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is

pressed. Access lamp will light while photo is recorded; next shot can

be taken immediately if enough space remains in memory buffer.

Single

frame

While shutter-release button is held down, camera records 1–4 frames

Continuous per second (1–7fps when high-speed crop is on;

41).^*Frame rate

low speed can be chosen using Custom Setting d1 (Shooting Speed;

197).

While shutter-release button is held down, camera records up to 5

frames per second (8fps when high-speed crop is on;

Continuous

high speed

41).^*

Use the self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by

camera shake ( 130).

Self-timer

Press shutter-release button once to raise mirror, again to take photo-

graph (shutter will be released automatically if shutter-release button is

not pressed for 30s after mirror up). Mirror will be lowered after shutter

is released. Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in situations

in which the least camera movement can result in blurred photographs.

Note that autofocus, metering, and framing can not be conﬁrmed in the

viewﬁnder while mirror is raised.

M-UP

Mirror up

*Average frame rate with continuous-

servo AF, manual or shutter-priority auto

exposure, a shutter speed of ½50 s or

faster, and memory remaining in mem-

ory buffer. Number of pictures that can

be stored in buffer depends on options

selected for image quality and Hi-speed

crop (see right; ﬁgures assume that ISO

sensitivity is set to ISO 100 equivalent,

long exposure noise reduction is off,

and Size priority is selected for JPEG

compression).

Hi-speed crop

Quality

Uncompressed NEF+JPEG

Compressed NEF+JPEG

Uncompressed NEF

Compressed NEF

TIFF (RGB)

Off

JPEG

To choose a shooting mode, press the mode dial

lock release and turn the mode dial to the desired

setting.

The Memory Buffer

The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shoot-

ing to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. The frame

rate will drop when the buffer is full.

While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to

the memory card slot will light. Depending on the number of the images in the buf-

fer, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the

memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp

has gone out. If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power

will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded. To turn the cam-

era off without recording the images in the buffer, press the

button while turning

the camera off (keep the button pressed for at least one second after turning the

camera off). If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter

release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.

The approximate time required to write the entire buffer to a 1GB SanDisk SDCFX

(Extreme III) card is as follows (ISO sensitivity set to ISO 100 equivalent, long exposure

noise reduction off, and Size priority selected for JPEG compression):

Quality

Uncompressed NEF (RAW)+JPEG Basic (Large)

Uncompressed NEF (RAW)

TIFF RGB (Large)

Hi-speed crop: Off

35s (16 frames)

35s (17 frames)

530s (16 frames)

16s (22 frames)

Hi-speed crop: On

40s (28 frames)

35s (29 frames)

590s (28 frames)

20s (38 frames)

JPEG Fine (Large)

Buffer Size

The number of images that can be stored in the memory

buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count

displays in the viewﬁnder and top control panel while

the shutter-release button is pressed.

d2—Maximum Shots ( 197)

The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be lim-

ited to any amount between 1 and 60.

Image Quality and Size

Making Effective Use of Memory

Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photo-

graph occupies on the memory card.

Image Quality

The D2Xs supports the following image quality options (listed in descending

order by image quality and ﬁle size):

Option

NEF (RAW) + Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one ﬁne-qual-

JPEG ﬁne ity JPEG image.

Description

NEF (RAW) + Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-

JPEG normal quality JPEG image.

NEF (RAW) + Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-qual-

JPEG basic ity JPEG image.

Raw 12-bit data from the image sensor are saved directly to the

memory card in Nikon Electronic Format (NEF).

NEF (RAW)

Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit depth of 8 bits per

channel (24-bit color). Time needed to record images increases.

TIFF (RGB)

JPEG ﬁne

Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:4.

JPEG normal Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:8.

JPEG basic Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:16.

NEF (RAW)/NEF+JPEG

NEF (RAW) images can only be viewed using compatible software such as PictureProject

or Capture NX ( 250). When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG ﬁne, NEF

(RAW) + JPEG normal, or NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic are viewed on the camera, only

the JPEG image will be displayed. When photographs taken at these settings are de-

leted, both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted.

White balance bracketing can not be used with NEF (RAW) images. Selecting an NEF

(RAW) option for image quality cancels white balance bracketing.

TIFF (RGB)

About 30s are required to record a TIFF (RGB) image (1GB SanDisk SDCFX (Extreme III)

card; recording time varies with make of memory card).

Image quality can be set using the Image quality option in the shooting

menu or by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the main command dial.

Two options are available for controlling compression: RAW compression for

NEF (RAW) images ( 48) and JPEG compression for JPEG images ( 47).

The Image Quality Menu

Highlight Image quality in the shooting

menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to

the right.

Highlight the desired option and press the

multi selector to the right. The shooting menu

will be displayed.

The QUAL Button

Press the QUAL button and rotate the main com-

mand dial (note that RAW compression and

JPEG compression can only be adjusted from the

shooting menu). Image quality is displayed in the

rear control panel and viewﬁnder sidebar:

Option

Rear panel Viewﬁnder

NEF (RAW) + JPEG ﬁne

RAW FINE

Rear control panel

RAW

NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal

NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic

NORM

RAW

BASIC

RAW

TIFF

NEF (RAW)

TIFF (RGB)

JPEG ﬁne

FINE

Viewﬁnder

NORM

BASIC

JPEG normal

JPEG basic

The JPEG Compression Menu

The JPEG compression menu offers the following options for JPEG images:

Option

Size priority Images are compressed to produce relatively uniform ﬁle size.

(default) Quality varies with scene recorded.

Description

Optimal quality Optimal image quality. File size varies with scene recorded.

The effects of these options are most pronounced with large image sizes

(

48), high ISO sensitivity ( 52), complex scenes, image quality settings of

RAW+BASIC or BASIC, or heavy sharpening ( 68). To choose an option:

Highlight JPEG compression in the shooting

menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to

the right.

Highlight the desired option and press the

multi selector to the right. The shooting menu

will be displayed. The selected option takes

effect whenever image quality is set to NEF

(RAW) + JPEG ﬁne, NEF (RAW) + JPEG nor-

mal, NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic, JPEG ﬁne,

JPEG normal, or JPEG basic.

File Names

Photographs are stored as image ﬁles with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx,”

where nnnn is a four-digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically

in ascending order by the camera, and xxx is one of the following three letter exten-

sions: “NEF” for NEF images, “TIF” for TIFF-RGB, “JPG” for JPEG images, and “NDF”

for Dust Off ref photos ( 221–222). The NEF and JPEG ﬁles recorded at a setting of

“NEF+JPEG” have the same ﬁle names but different extensions. Images recorded at a

Color space setting of Adobe RGB ( 70) have names that begin with an underbar

(e.g., “_DSC0001.JPG”). The “DSC” portion of the ﬁle name can be changed using

the File naming option in the shooting menu ( 173).

The Raw Compression Menu

The following options are available for NEF (RAW) images:

Option

Description

NEF images are not compressed.

NEF (RAW)

(default)

NEF images are compressed, reducing ﬁle size by about 40–50%

percent with almost no effect on image quality.

Comp. NEF

(RAW)

Highlight RAW compression in the shooting

menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to

the right.

Highlight the desired option and press the multi

selector to the right. The shooting menu will

be displayed. The selected option takes effect

whenever image quality is set to NEF (RAW) +

JPEG ﬁne, NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal, NEF

(RAW) + JPEG basic, or NEF (RAW).

Image Size

Image size is measured in pixels. Smaller sizes produce smaller ﬁles, making

them suited to distribution via e-mail or inclusion in web pages. Conversely,

the larger the image, the larger the size at which it can be printed without

becoming noticeably “grainy.” Choose image size according to the space

available on the memory card and the task at hand (note that image size

varies depending on the setting selected for Hi-speed crop;

41).

Hi-speed crop: Off

Size (pixels)

Print size (cm)^*

4,288×2,848 54.5×36.2 (21˝×14˝) 3,216×2,136 40.8×27.1 (16˝×11˝)

Hi-speed crop: On

Option

Size (pixels)

Print size (cm)^*

Large

Medium 3,216×2,136 40.8×27.1 (16˝×11˝) 2,400×1,600 30.5×20.3 (12˝×8˝)

Small 2,144×1,424 27.2×18.1 (11˝×7˝) 1,600×1,064 20.3×13.5 (8˝×5˝)

*Approximate size when printed at 200dpi.

Image size can be set using the Image size option in the shooting menu or

by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the sub-command dial. Note that

the option selected does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images. When

opened software such as PictureProject or Capture NX, NEF images are

4,288×2,848 (high-speed crop off) or 3,216×2,136 (high-speed crop on)

pixels in size.

The Image Size Menu

Highlight Image size in the shooting menu

(

168) and press the multi selector to the

right.

Highlight the desired option and press the

multi selector to the right (note that the

pixel size listed will vary to reﬂect the option

currently selected for Hi-speed crop). The

shooting menu will be displayed.

The QUAL Button

Image size can also be set by pressing the QUAL

button and rotating the sub-command dial. Im-

age size is displayed in the rear control panel and

in the viewﬁnder sidebar:

Rear control panel

Viewﬁnder

Memory Card Capacity and Image Quality/Size

The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on

a 1GB card at different image quality and size settings.

Hi-speed crop: Off

Hi-speed crop: On

Image

size

L⁶

M⁶

S⁶

L⁶

M⁶

S⁶

L⁶

M⁶

S⁶

—

File

No. of

Buffer

File

No. of

Buffer

Image quality

size¹

images¹capacity²

size¹

images¹capacity²

25.1MB

22.6MB

20.7MB

22.2MB

20.9MB

20.0MB

20.7MB

20.1MB

19.6MB

19.2MB

36.5MB

21.2MB

10.3MB

5.9MB

3.3MB

1.5MB

2.9MB

1.7MB

0.76MB

1.5MB

0.85MB

0.39MB

14.2MB

12.8MB

11.8MB

12.6MB

11.9MB

11.4MB

11.8MB

11.4MB

11.2MB

10.9MB

20.5MB

11.9MB

5.8MB

3.3MB

1.9MB

0.84MB

1.7MB

0.95MB

0.44MB

0.85MB

0.49MB

0.23MB

NEF+JPEG

Fine^{3, 4, 5}

NEF+JPEG

Normal^{3, 4, 5}

NEF+JPEG

Basic^{3, 4, 5}

NEF (RAW)⁴

TIFF (RGB)

104

138

244

538

274

473

1000

538

919

1900

183

244

433

919

473

822

1700

919

1500

3100

JPEG Fine⁵

JPEG Normal⁵

JPEG Basic⁵

1All ﬁgures are approximate. Size of JPEG ﬁles varies with scene recorded.

2Maximum number of frames that can be stored in memory buffer. Drops when Long

Exp. NR is on, when ISO sensitivity is set to HI-0.3 or higher, or when High ISO NR

is on and Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) is on or ISO sensitivity is ISO 400 or higher.

3Total for NEF and JPEG images.

4Figures assume RAW compression is set to NEF (RAW). Selecting Comp. NEF

(RAW) decreases ﬁle size of NEF (RAW) images by approximately forty to ﬁfty per-

cent; although number of exposures remaining does not change, number of images

that can be recorded increases.

5Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority. Selecting Optimal qual-

ity increases ﬁle size of JPEG images by up to eighty percent; number of images and

buffer capacity drop accordingly.

6Applies to JPEG images only. File size of NEF (RAW) images can not be changed.

Number of Exposures Remaining

The number of exposures remaining shown in the exposure count displays in the

control panel and viewﬁnder is only an approximation. The number of compressed

NEF or JPEG images that can be stored on a memory card depends on the subject and

composition of each photograph. In general, the more detailed the image, the larger

the resulting ﬁle and the fewer the images that can be stored.

Large-Capacity Memory Cards

When enough memory remains on the memory card to

record a thousand or more pictures at current settings,

the number of exposures remaining will be shown in

thousands, rounded down to the nearest hundred (e.g.,

if there is room for approximately 1,260 exposures, the

exposure count display will show 1.2K).

d2—Maximum Shots ( 197)

The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be lim-

ited to any amount between 1 and 60.

ISO Sensitivity

Reacting Faster to Light

“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of ﬁlm speed. The higher the ISO

sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter

speeds or smaller apertures.

ISO sensitivity can be set between values roughly equivalent to ISO 100 and

ISO 800 in steps equivalent to /3 EV. Settings over ISO 800 are available

where high sensitivity is a priority:

EV steps over ISO 800 ISO equivalent Control panel display Viewﬁnder display

Approximately ¹

1000

1100

1250

1600

3200

†

Approximately ½

Approximately ²

Approximately 1

Approximately 2

*Available only when 1/3 step is selected for Custom Setting b2 (ISO step value).

†Available only when 1/2 step is selected for Custom Setting b2 (ISO step value).

ISO sensitivity can be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity option in the shoot-

ing menu or by pressing the ISO button and rotating the main command

dial.

The ISO Menu

Highlight ISO sensitivity in the shooting

menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to

the right.

Highlight the desired option and press the

multi selector to the right. The shooting menu

will be displayed.

The ISO Button

ISO sensitivity can also be set by pressing the ISO

button and rotating the main command dial. ISO

sensitivity is displayed in the control panels and

viewﬁnder sidebar:

Top control panel

Rear control panel

Viewﬁnder

Noise

The higher the ISO sensitivity, the more likely pictures are to be subject to “noise” in

the form of randomly-spaced, brightly-colored pixels. Photos taken at settings over

ISO 800 will likely contain appreciable amounts of noise.

High ISO NR ( 176)

This option can be used to reduce noise at ISO sensitivities of ISO 400 or more (this

reduces the capacity of the memory buffer). Note that although noise reduction is

always in effect at ISO sensitivities over ISO 800, selecting On for High ISO NR will

increase the amount of noise reduction performed.

b1—ISO Auto ( 191)

When On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto), the camera will automatically

vary ISO sensitivity from the value selected by the user to help ensure optimum expo-

sure. ISO sensitivity can not be set to values over ISO 800 while ISO auto is on, and On

can not be selected for ISO auto is when ISO is set to a value over ISO 800.

b2—ISO Step Value ( 192)

Depending on the option selected for Custom Setting b2, ISO sensitivity can also be set

in increments equivalent to ½ or 1EV.

ISO step value set to 1/2 step

ISO step value set to 1 step

If possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting is maintained when the step value is

changed. If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value,

ISO sensitivity will be rounded up to the nearest available setting.

d5—Cntrl Panel/Finder>Rear Control Panel ( 199)

If Exposures remaining is selected for Cntrl panel/ﬁnder>Rear control panel

(Custom Setting d5), ISO sensitivity will only be displayed in the rear control panel

while the ISO button is pressed. If ISO sensitivity is selected, ISO sensitivity will be

displayed except during voice memo recording and playback.

White Balance

Keeping Colors True

The color of light reﬂected from an object varies with the color of the light

source. The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light

source, with the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the

shade, direct sunlight, or under incandescent lighting. Unlike the ﬁlm used in

ﬁlm cameras, digital cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing images

according to the color of the light source. This is known as “white balance.”

For natural coloration, choose a white balance setting that matches the light

source before shooting. The following options are available:

Approximate

color

Option

temperature^*

Description

White balance adjusted automatically using color

temperature measured by 1,005-pixel RGB sen-

sor, image sensor, and ambient light sensor. For

best results, use type G or D lens. With SB-800

or SB-600 Speedlight, white balance reﬂects

conditions in effect when Speedlight ﬁres.

3,500–

8,000K

Auto

Incandescent

Fluorescent

Direct sunlight

Flash

3,000K

4,200K

5,200K

5,400K

6,000K

8,000K

Use under incandescent lighting.

Use under ﬂuorescent lighting.

Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.

Use with Nikon Speedlights.

Cloudy

Use in daylight under overcast skies.

Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.

Choose color temperature from list of values

Shade

Choose color

temp.

2,500–

10,000K

(

59).

White balance

preset

Use subject, light source, or existing photo-

graph as reference for white balance ( 60).

—

*Fine-tuning set to 0.

Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If the desired

results can not be achieved with auto white balance, choose an option from

the list above or use preset white balance.

White balance can be set using the White balance option in the shooting

menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial.

The White Balance Menu

Highlight White balance in the shooting

menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to

the right.

Highlight the desired option and press the

multi selector to the right. Selecting Choose

color temp. displays a menu of color tem-

peratures ( 59), White balance preset a

preset white balance menu (

60), other

options a ﬁne-tuning dialog ( 57).

The WB Button

White balance can also be set by pressing the

WB button and rotating the main command dial.

White balance is displayed in the rear control

panel and viewﬁnder sidebar:

Rear control panel

Viewﬁnder

Studio Strobe Lighting

Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with studio strobe lighting.

Choose a color temperature, use preset white balance, or set white balance to Flash

and use ﬁne tuning to adjust white balance.

e5—Auto BKT Set ( 203)

When WB bracketing is selected for custom setting e5 (Auto BKT set), the camera

will create several images each time the shutter is released. White balance will be var-

ied with each image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance.

Fine-Tuning White Balance

At settings other than

(Choose color temp.) and PRE (preset), white

balance can be “ﬁne tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of

the light source or to introduce a deliberate “warm” or “cold” cast into

an image. Higher settings can be used to lend images a bluish tinge or to

compensate for light sources with a yellow or red cast, while lowering white

balance can make photographs appear slightly more yellow or red or com-

pensate for light sources with a blue cast. Adjustments can be made in the

range +3 to –3 in increments of one. Except in Fluorescent mode, each

increment is equivalent to about 10 mired.

White balance is ﬁne tuned using the White balance option in the shooting

menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial.

The White Balance Menu

In the white balance menu ( 55), highlight

an option other than Choose color temp. or

White balance preset and press the multi

selector to the right.

Press the multi selector up or down to choose

the desired value and press the multi selector

to the right. The shooting menu will be dis-

played.

Color Temperature

The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color

temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, deﬁned with ref-

erence to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light

in the same wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neigh-

borhood of 5,000–5,500K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature,

such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a

higher color temperature appear tinged with blue.

The WB Button

Press the WB button and rotate the sub-command

dial until the desired value is displayed in the rear

control panel. At settings other than 0, a

icon appears in the rear control panel and view-

ﬁnder sidebar.

Viewﬁnder

Rear control panel

Fine-Tuning and Color Temperature

Approximate color-temperatures for settings other than A (auto) are given below (val-

ues may differ from color temperatures given by photo color meters):

Direct

sunlight

4,800K

4,900K

5,000K

5,200K

5,300K

5,400K

5,600K

Cloudy

(daylight)

5,400K

5,600K

5,800K

6,000K

6,200K

6,400K

6,600K

Shade

(daylight)

6,700K

7,100K

7,500K

8,000K

8,400K

8,800K

9,200K

Incandescent Fluorescent^*

Flash

–1

–2

–3

2,700K

2,800K

2,900K

3,000K

3,100K

3,200K

3,300K

2,700K

3,000K

3,700K

4,200K

5,000K

6,500K

7,200K

4,800K

5,000K

5,200K

5,400K

5,600K

5,800K

6,000K

*The size of the increments for Fluorescent reﬂects the wide variations in color tem-

perature among the many different types of ﬂuorescent light source, ranging from

low-temperature stadium lighting to high-temperature mercury-vapor lamps.

“Mired”

Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low

color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change

of 1000K produces a much greater change in color at 3000K than at 6000K. Mired,

calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10⁶, is a measure of

color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used

in color-temperature compensation ﬁlters. E.g.:

• 4000K–3000K(a difference of 1000K)=83mired

• 7000K–6000K(a difference of 1000K)=24mired

Choosing a Color Temperature

Choose a setting of (Choose color temp.) to select the color temperature

from thirty-one predetermined values ranging from 2,500K to 10,000K in

increments of roughly 10 mired (note that the desired results will not be ob-

tained with ﬂash or ﬂuorescent lighting). Color temperature can be selected

in the white-balance menu or with the WB button and sub-command dial.

The White Balance Menu

In the white balance menu ( 55), highlight

an Choose color temp. and press the multi

selector to the right.

Highlight the desired color temperature and

press the multi selector to the right. The

shooting menu will be displayed.

The WB Button

At a setting of

(Choose color temp.), color

temperature can be selected by pressing the WB

button and rotating the sub-command dial. The

color temperature is displayed in the rear control

panel:

…

Take Test Shots

Take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate to the light source.

Preset White Balance

Preset white balance is used to record and recall custom white balance set-

tings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources

with a strong color cast. Four options are available for setting preset white

balance:

Recording New Values with the Camera

(1) Frame a neutral gray or white object and press the shutter-release button

to measure a value for white balance ( 61).

(2) Measure white balance with the ambient light sensor ( 61).

Copying Values from Existing Photographs

(3) Copy white balance from another image on the memory card ( 66).

The camera can store up to ﬁve values for preset white balance in presets

d-0–d-4. White balance values recorded with options (1) and (2) are stored

in preset d-0. To prevent this value from being replaced the next time white

balance is measured, the value stored in d-0 can be copied to presets d-1–d-4

for long-term storage ( 67). White balance values copied using option (3)

are also stored in presets d-1–d-4. A descriptive comment can be added to

any white balance preset ( 65).

d-0

d-1–d-4

Stores last val-

ue measured

for white bal-

ance ( 61).

Store values copied from d-0 (

67).

Store values cop-

ied from images

on memory card

(

66).

White Balance Presets

Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks ( 169). A con-

ﬁrmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to change a white balance preset

created in another shooting menu bank (no warning is displayed for preset d-0).

Measuring a Value for White Balance

White balance can be measured with reference to a neutral gray object or by

measuring the color of the light source. The new value for white balance is

automatically stored in preset d-0.

Reference

Description

A standard gray card or other neutral gray or white object is placed

under lighting that will be used in ﬁnal photograph and white balance

is measured using both 1,005-pixel RGB sensor and main image sensor.

Use for ﬂash photography or when the subject and camera are under

different lighting.

Neutral

gray

object

Color of light source is measured by sensor on camera pentaprism and

white balance adjusted to produce natural coloration without reference

object. Use when subject is under same lighting as camera.

Light

source

Press the WB button and rotate the main com-

mand dial until is displayed in the rear

control panel or viewﬁnder sidebar.

Rear control panel

Viewﬁnder

If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately, select

preset d-0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial

until d-0 is displayed in the rear control panel ( 64). Otherwise there is

no need to select d-0 when measuring a new value for white balance.

Release the WB button brieﬂy and then press

the button until the icon in the rear control

panel and viewﬁnder sidebar start to ﬂash. A

blinking will also appear in the top control

panel and viewﬁnder frame-count displays.

Rear control panel

Top control panel

Viewﬁnder

To measure white balance using a neutral gray or white object…

…frame the reference object so that it ﬁlls the

viewﬁnder and press the shutter-release but-

ton all the way down. The camera will mea-

sure a value for white balance and store it in

preset d-0. No photograph will be recorded;

white balance can be measured accurately

even when the camera is not in focus.

To measure the color of the light source…

…make sure that the ambient light sensor is

lit by the light source and press the FUNC.

button. The camera will calculate a value for

white balance and store it in preset d-0.

To exit without measuring a new value for

white balance, press the WB button.

Exposure Mode

Preset white balance can be measured in all exposure modes. When using a reference

object to set white balance, do not alter exposure from the value suggested by the

camera.

If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance,

will

ﬂash for about three seconds in the control panels, while the viewﬁnder

will show a ﬂashing

Viewﬁnder

Rear control panel

Top control panel

If lighting is too dark or too bright, or if some types of artiﬁcial lighting

are used when measuring white balance using the ambient light sensor,

the camera may be unable to measure white balance. A ﬂashing

will appear in the control panels and viewﬁnder for about three seconds.

Return to Step 3 and measure white balance again. If the camera is un-

able to measure white balance using the ambient light sensor, try mea-

suring white balance using a neutral gray or white reference object.

Viewﬁnder

Rear control panel

Top control panel

The new value for white balance will be stored in

preset d-0, automatically replacing the previous

value for this preset (no conﬁrmation dialog will

be displayed). If white balance was set using a

reference object, a thumbnail will be displayed in

the preset white balance list. Presets measured

using the ambient light sensor are marked by a

icon.

To use the new value for white balance, select preset d-0 (if no value has

been measured for white balance before d-0 is selected, white balance

will be set to a color temperature of 5,200K, the same as Direct sun-

light). The new white balance value will remain in preset d-0 until white

balance is measured again. By copying preset d-0 to one of the other

presets before measuring a new value for white balance, up to ﬁve white

balance values can be stored ( 67).

Selecting a White Balance Preset

To set white balance to a preset value:

Highlight White balance preset in the white

balance menu ( 55) and press the multi se-

lector to the right. The menu shown at right

will be displayed. (To return to the shooting

menu, press the

button.)

Presets are identiﬁed by an icon or thumbnail,

a name (d-0–d-4), and a comment. Press the

multi selector up, down, left, or right to high-

light the desired preset. To select the high-

lighted preset and return to shooting mode

without completing steps 3–5, press the

button.

Press the center of the multi selector to display

the menu shown at right. To view options for

other presets, highlight the name of the cur-

rent preset (d-0–d-4) and press the multi

selector right.

Selecting a White Balance Preset: the WB Button

At a setting of

(White balance preset), presets

can also be selected by pressing the WB button and

rotating the sub-command dial. The current preset is

displayed in the rear control panel while the WB button

is pressed.

Press the multi selector up or down to high-

light Set.

Press the multi selector to the right to set

white balance to the value stored in the

selected preset and return to the shooting

menu.

Entering a Comment

To enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty-six

characters for a selected white balance preset,

highlight the preset in the thumbnail display and

press the center of the multi selector as described

in steps 1–3 on the previous page. The menu

shown at right will be displayed.

Press the multi selector up or down to high-

light Edit comment.

Press the multi selector to the right to display

the text edit dialog. Edit the comment as de-

scribed on page 217.

Press the button to return to the thumbnail

display.

Copying White Balance from a Photograph (d-1–d-4 Only)

To copy a value for white balance from a photo-

graph on the memory card to a selected preset

(d-1–d-4 only), highlight the preset in the thumb-

nail display and press the center of the multi se-

lector as described in steps 1–3 on page 64. The

menu shown at right will be displayed.

Press the multi selector up or down to high-

light Select image.

Press the multi selector to the right to display

the photographs on the memory card. Only

photographs taken with the D2Xs will be dis-

played; other images can not be selected.

Press the multi selector up, down, left, or right

to highlight the desired image. To view the

highlighted image full frame, press the but-

ton. Press the button again to return to the

thumbnail list.

Press the center of the multi selector to copy

the white balance value for the highlighted

photograph to the selected preset and return

to the thumbnail display. If the highlighted

photograph has a comment, the comment

will be copied to the comment for the selected

preset.

Copying White Balance from d-0 to Presets d-1–d-4

To copy a measured value for white balance

from d-0 to any of the other presets (d-1–d-4),

highlight the destination preset in the thumbnail

display and press the center of the multi selector

as described in steps 1–3 on page 64. The menu

shown at right will be displayed.

Press the multi selector up or down to high-

light Copy d-0.

Press the multi selector to the right to copy

white balance from d-0 to the selected preset

and return to the thumbnail display. If com-

ment has been created for d-0, the comment

will be copied to the comment for the selected

preset.

Image Adjustment

Shooting Menu Settings

This section describes settings that can only be adjusted from the shooting

menu ( 168).

Making Edges More Distinct: Image Sharpening

When a photograph is taken, the camera automatically processes the image

to increase the distinction between light and dark areas, making the picture

appear sharper. The Image sharpening menu controls the amount of

sharpening performed.

Option

Description

The camera automatically adjusts sharpening according to the

subject and how other camera settings are adjusted. Amount

of sharpening varies from shot to shot, even in scenes of same

type; to take multiple shots with same sharpening, choose dif-

ferent setting. For best results, use a type G or D lens.

Auto

(default)

Normal

Low

Camera sharpens all images the same standard amount.

Images are sharpened less than the standard amount.

Medium low Images are sharpened slightly less than the standard amount.

Medium high Images are sharpened slightly more than the standard amount.

High

Images are sharpened more than the standard amount.

Images are not sharpened.

None

Highlight Image sharpening in the shooting

menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to

the right.

Highlight the desired option and press the

multi selector to the right. The shooting menu

will be displayed.

Adjusting Contrast: Tone Compensation

As photographs are saved to the memory card, they are processed to adjust

the distribution of tones in the image, enhancing contrast. Tone compen-

sation is performed by means of tone curves that deﬁne the relationship

between the distribution of tones in the original image and the compensated

result. The Tone compensation menu controls the type of curve used.

Option

Description

Camera automatically optimizes contrast by selecting the appropriate

curve. Curve varies from shot to shot, even in scenes of same type;

to take multiple shots with same curve, choose different setting. For

best results, use a type G or D lens.

Auto

(default)

Camera uses same standard curve for all images. Suited to most

scenes, whether dark or bright.

Normal

Less

Produces “softer” images. Prevents highlights on portrait subjects

contrast from being “washed out” in direct sunlight.

More Choose this curve to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other

contrast low-contrast subjects.

Camera Control Pro (available separately) can be used to download

up to three custom tone curves to the camera. Choose Custom to

select a user-deﬁned curve ( 72). If no custom curve has been cre-

ated, this option is equivalent to Normal.

Custom

Highlight Tone compensation in the shoot-

ing menu ( 168) and press the multi selector

to the right.

Highlight the desired option and press the

multi selector to the right. If Custom is se-

lected, a menu of custom tone curves will be

displayed ( 72). Otherwise, the shooting

menu will be displayed.

Suiting Colors to a Workﬂow: Color Space

The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduc-

tion. Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed

on leaving the camera.

Option

sRGB

Description

Choose for photographs that will be printed or used “as is,” with

sRGB

(default) no further modiﬁcation. Color mode II is not available ( 72).

This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors

than sRGB, making it the preferred choice for images that will be

extensively processed or retouched. Black-and-white (sRGB) is

Adobe AdobeRGB

not available for Color mode when this option is in effect.

Highlight Color space in the shooting menu

168) and press the multi selector to the

right.

(

Highlight the desired option and press the

multi selector to the right. The shooting menu

will be displayed.

Color Space

sRGB is recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modiﬁ-

cation or viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when tak-

ing photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct printing option on some

household printers, or kiosk printing or other commercial print services. Adobe RGB

photographs can also be printed using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.

JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0 com-

pliant; applications and printers that support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0 will select the cor-

rect color space automatically. If the application or device does not support Exif 2.21

and DCF 2.0, select the appropriate color space manually. An ICC color proﬁle is em-

bedded in TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space, allowing applications

that support color management to automatically select the correct color space. For

more information, see the documentation provided with the application or device.

Nikon Software

Capture NX (available separately) and PictureProject automatically select the correct

color space when opening photographs created with the D2Xs.

Matching Colors to the Subject: Color Mode

Much as ﬁlm cameras offer a choice of ﬁlms for different subjects, the D2Xs

offers a choice of color modes with subtly different palettes.

Option

Description

Choose for portrait shots.

(default)

Choose for photographs that will be extensively processed or

retouched. This option is available only when AdobeRGB is

selected for Color space.

III

Choose for nature or landscape shots.

Take pictures in black-and-white with a wide tone range suited

a wide variety of subjects, from portraits to landscapes. This op-

tion is only available when sRGB is selected for Color Space.

Black-and-white

(sRGB)

Highlight Color mode in the shooting menu

( 168) and press the multi selector to the

right.

Highlight the desired option and press the

multi selector to the right. The shooting menu

will be displayed.

Color Space and Color Mode

If sRGB is chosen for Color space when Color mode is set to Mode II, Color mode

will be reset to the mode in effect when sRGB was last selected. Selecting Adobe

RGB for Color space when Black-and-white (sRGB) is selected for Color mode sets

Color mode to II.

Controlling Color: Hue Adjustment

Hue can be adjusted in the range about –9° to +9° in increments of 3°. If

red is taken as the starting color, raising hue above 0° (the default setting)

would introduce a yellow cast, making colors that would be red at a setting

of 0° appear increasingly orange. Lowering hue below 0° would introduce

a blue cast, making colors that would be red at a setting of 0° appear in-

creasingly purple.

Highlight Hue adjustment in the shooting

menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to

the right.

Highlight the desired option and press the

multi selector to the right. The shooting menu

will be displayed.

Hue

The RGB color model used in digital photographs reproduces colors using differing

amounts of red, green, and blue light. By mixing two colors of light, a variety of

different colors can be produced. For example, red combined with a small amount

of green light produces orange. If red and green are mixed in equal amounts, yel-

low results, while a smaller amount of red produces a yellow green. Mixing different

amounts of red and blue light produces colors ranging from a reddish purple through

purple to navy, while mixing different amounts of green and blue light produces colors

ranging from emerald to turquoise. (Adding a third color of light results in lighter hues;

if all three mixed in equal amounts, the results range from white through gray.) When

this progression of hues is arranged in a circle, the result is known as a color wheel.

Focus

Controlling How the Camera Focuses

This section describes the options that control how your camera focuses:

focus mode, focus-area selection, and AF-area mode.

Focus Mode

Focus mode is controlled by the focus mode

selector on the front of the camera. There are

two autofocus (AF) modes, in which the camera

focuses automatically when the shutter-release

button is pressed halfway, and one manual focus

mode, in which focus must be adjusted manually

using the focusing ring on the lens:

Option

Description

Camera focuses when shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus

Single-servo locks when in-focus indicator (●) appears in viewﬁnder, and remains

locked while shutter-release button is pressed halfway (focus lock).

Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release button is pressed

halfway. If subject moves, camera will engage predictive focus track-

ing to predict ﬁnal distance to subject and adjust focus as necessary.

At default settings, shutter can be released whether or not subject is in

focus (release priority).

Continuous-

servo AF

Camera does not focus automatically; focus must be adjusted manu-

ally using the lens focusing ring. If maximum aperture of lens is f/5.6

or faster, viewﬁnder focus indicator can be used to conﬁrm focus

(electronic range ﬁnding), but photographs can be taken at any time,

whether or not camera is in focus.

Manual

Choose single-servo AF for landscapes and other stationary subjects. Con-

tinuous-servo AF may be a better choice with erratically-moving subjects.

Manual focus is recommended when the camera is unable to focus using

autofocus.

The AF-ON Buttons

For the purpose of focusing the camera, pressing either of the AF-ON buttons has the

same effect as pressing the shutter-release button halfway (the AF-ON button for verti-

cal shooting can only be used when the shutter-release button for vertical shooting is

unlocked).

a1—AF-C Mode Priority ( 185)

If Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C mode priority), photographs can be

taken in continuous servo-AF only when the camera is in focus. Select FPS rate+ AF

for improved focus during continuous shooting.

a2—AF-S Mode Priority ( 185)

If Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S mode priority), photographs can

be taken in single servo-AF even when the camera is not in focus.

a5—AF Activation ( 188)

If AF-ON only is selected for Custom Setting a5 (AF activation), the camera will only

focus when one of the AF-ON buttons is pressed, not when the shutter-release button

is pressed halfway.

a8—Vertical AF-ON ( 190)

Custom Setting a8 (Vertical AF-ON) controls whether the AF-ON button for vertical

shooting is used to initiate autofocus, select the focus area, or both.

c2—AE-L/AF-L ( 195)

If desired, the AE-L/AF-L button can perform the same function as the AF-ON button.

Focus Area Selection

The D2Xs offers a choice of eleven focus areas that together cover a wide

area of the frame. The focus area can be selected manually, allowing pho-

tographs to be composed the main subject positioned almost anywhere in

the frame, or automatically to ensure that the subject closest to the camera

is always in focus regardless of where it is the frame (closest-subject priority;

79). Group dynamic-AF can be used to focus on the closest subject in a

selected area of the frame ( 79).

To select the focus area, rotate the focus selector

lock. The multi selector can then be used to se-

lect the focus area. The selected focus area is dis-

played in the top control panel and is highlighted

brieﬂy in the viewﬁnder.

To select the center focus area (or focus area

group) at any time, press the center of the multi

selector.

The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked position following se-

lection to prevent the selected focus area from changing when the multi

selector is pressed.

High-Speed Crop

The two focus areas outside the high-speed crop are

not available when high-speed crop is on ( 41).

Focus areas not available

when high-speed crop is on

Focus Area Selection

The focus area can not be changed during playback or while menus are displayed.

Focus Area Selection for Portrait (Tall) Orientation Photographs

If the shutter-release button for vertical shooting is un-

locked, the focus area can also be selected by pressing

the AF-ON button for vertical shooting and rotating the

sub-command dial for vertical shooting. The selected

focus area is displayed in the top control panel and is

highlighted brieﬂy in the viewﬁnder.

Rotate the sub-command dial clockwise to cycle end-

lessly through focus areas in the order shown at right,

counter-clockwise to cycle through focus areas in the

reverse order. Focus areas 5 and 10 are not available

when high-speed crop is on.

a6—Focus Area Illum ( 189)

Custom Setting a6 (Focus area Illum) controls how long the focus area is illuminated

in the viewﬁnder after selection and whether focus areas are displayed in manual focus

mode or continuous shooting mode.

a7—Focus Area ( 190)

This option can be used to set focus area selection to “wrap around.”

a8—Vertical AF-ON ( 190)

Custom Setting a8 (Vertical AF-ON) controls whether the AF-ON button for vertical

shooting is used to initiate autofocus, select the focus area, or both.

f1—Center Button>Shooting Mode ( 205)

Depending on the option selected for Center button>Shooting mode (Custom Set-

ting f1), pressing the center of the multi selector will have no effect or will illuminate

the selected focus area.

Autofocus

When the focus mode selector is set to S (single-servo autofocus) or C (con-

tinuous-servo autofocus), the camera focuses automatically when the shut-

ter-release button is pressed halfway. This section describes focus options

that are only available in single- and continuous-servo AF.

AF-Area Mode

AF-area mode determines how the focus area is

selected in autofocus mode. To select the AF-area

mode, rotate the AF-area mode selector. The se-

lected mode is shown by an icon in the top control

panel (see following page).

Manual Focus

Single-area AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.

The Top Control Panel

The selected focus area or group of focus areas is shown in the top control panel in

single-area AF, dynamic-area AF, and group dynamic-AF. The illustrations in the “Icon”

column show the display when the center focus area or focus area group is selected.

The top control panel display does not show the focus area selected by the camera for

dynamic-area AF with closest subject priority.

a1—AF-C Mode Priority ( 185)

In focus mode C (continuous-servo autofocus) photographs can be taken even when

the camera is not in focus (release priority). To ensure that the camera is in focus when

the picture is taken, choose Focus for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C mode priority). Se-

lect FPS rate+ AF for improved focus during continuous shooting.

a2—AF-S Mode Priority ( 185)

In focus mode S (single-servo autofocus) photographs can be taken only when the

camera is in focus (focus priority). To allow photographs to be taken regardless of

whether or not the camera is in focus, choose Release for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S

mode priority).

a3—Group Dynamic AF ( 186)

This option controls how focus areas are grouped in group dynamic-AF mode and

whether the camera tracks the subject in the center focus area of the selected group.

a4—Lock-On ( 188)

This option controls whether the camera immediately adjusts focus to track a subject

when the distance to the subject changes drastically.

Mode

Icon

Description

User selects focus area manually; camera focuses on subject in

selected focus area only. Use for relatively static compositions

with subjects that will stay in selected focus area. Focus areas

outside high-speed crop can not be selected when high-speed

crop is on ( 41).

Single-

area AF

User selects focus area manually, but camera uses information

from multiple focus areas to determine focus. If subject leaves

selected focus area even brieﬂy, camera will focus based on

information from other focus areas (focus area selected in view-

ﬁnder does not change). Use when following erratically moving

subjects in continuous-servo AF and in other situations in which

it is difﬁcult to keep subject in selected focus area.

Dynamic-

area AF

• When high-speed crop is on (

41), focus areas

outside high-speed crop can not be selected, and

camera will not use these areas to determine focus.

User chooses focus area group (see

right). Camera focuses on center

of selected group; if subject leaves

focus area even brieﬂy, camera

focuses based on information from

other focus areas in same group.

Use when subject is moving errati-

cally but place of subject in overall

composition is known.

Top

Left Center Right

Bottom

Group

dynamic-

• When high-speed crop is on ( 41), left

and right focus-area groups do not include

focus areas outside high-speed crop.

Left

Right

Camera selects focus area containing principal subject closest

to camera. Prevents out-of-focus shots when photographing

erratically moving subjects. Focus area can not be selected

manually, and focus areas are not displayed in viewﬁnder or top

control panel. Camera may be unable to select focus area con-

taining closest subject when telephoto lens is used or subject is

poorly lit. Single-area AF is recommended in these cases.

• When high-speed crop is on ( 41), camera will not

select focus areas outside high-speed crop.

Dynamic-

area AF

with

closest

subject

priority

Summary of Autofocus Options

Focus mode

AF-area mode

Control-panel display

Focus-area selection

Single-area AF

Manual

Dynamic-area AF

Manual

AF-S

Manual

(camera focuses on

center focus area of

selected group)

Group dynamic-AF

Dynamic-area AF

with closest-

subject priority

Automatic

Manual

Single-area AF

Dynamic-area AF

Manual

AF-C

Manual

(camera focuses on

center focus area of

selected group)

Group dynamic-AF

Dynamic-area AF

with closest-

Automatic

subject priority

How it works

When to use it

Camera focuses on subject in selected focus area. Use with static subjects when

Focus will remain locked while shutter-release button time is available to compose

is pressed halfway.

photo.

Camera focuses on subject in selected focus area. If

subject moves before camera has focused, camera

will focus based on information from other focus

areas. Focus will remain locked while shutter-release

button is pressed halfway.

Use with static subjects when

time is available to compose

photo.

As above, except camera focuses on subject in center Use when sure of subject’s

focus area of selected group. If subject moves before place in overall composition

camera has focused, camera will focus based on in- but unsure of its exact posi-

formation from other focus areas in same group.

tion.

As above, except that camera selects focus area con- Use when sure that subject

taining principal subject closest to camera. If subject will be closest object to cam-

moves before camera has focused, camera will focus era but unsure where it will

based on information from other focus areas.

appear in ﬁnal composition.

Camera continues to focus on subject in selected Use with moving subjects that

focus area while shutter-release button is pressed can be continuously framed

halfway.

in single focus area.

Camera focuses on subject in selected focus area.

While shutter-release button is pressed halfway, cam-

era tracks subject as it moves from one focus area to

the next.

Use with subjects that are

moving unpredictably.

Use when sure of moving

subject’s place in overall com-

position but unable to predict

its exact position.

As above, except camera focuses on subject in center

focus area of selected group.

Use with erratically moving

subjects when you know

subject will be closest object

to camera.

As above, except that camera selects focus area con-

taining principal subject closest to camera.

Focus Lock

Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing, making

it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus area in the ﬁnal

composition. It can also be used when the autofocus system is unable to

focus ( 84).

In single-servo AF, focus locks automatically when the in-focus indicator (●)

appears in the viewﬁnder. In continuous-servo AF, focus must be locked

manually using the AE-L/AF-L button. To recompose a photograph using

focus lock:

Position the subject in the selected focus area and press the shutter-re-

lease button halfway to initiate focus.

Check that the in-focus indicator (●) appears in the viewﬁnder.

Single-servo AF

Focus will lock automatically when the in-

focus indicator appears, and remain locked

until you remove your ﬁnger from the shutter-

release button. Focus can also be locked by

pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (see below).

Continuous-servo AF

Press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock both focus

and exposure. Focus will remain locked while

the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if you

later remove your ﬁnger from the shutter-re-

lease button.

Recompose the photograph and shoot.

In single-servo AF, focus will remain locked between shots as long as the

shutter-release button is kept pressed halfway, allowing several photographs

in succession to be taken at the same focus setting. Focus will also remain

locked between shots while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.

Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus

lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.

c2—AE-L/AF-L ( 195)

This option controls whether the AE-L/AF-L button locks focus and exposure (the de-

fault setting), focus only, or exposure only.

Getting Good Results with Autofocus

Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. If the

camera is unable to focus using autofocus, use manual focus ( 85) or use

focus lock ( 82) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then

recompose the photograph.

AF-Assist Illuminators

If the subject is dark, an optional Speedlight with an AF-assist illuminator can be used

to assist the autofocus.

Manual Focus

Manual focus is available for lenses that do not

support autofocus (non-AF Nikkor lenses) or

when the autofocus does not produce the desired

results ( 84). To focus manually, set the focus-

mode selector to M and adjust the lens focusing

ring until the image displayed on the clear matte

ﬁeld in the viewﬁnder is in focus. Photographs

can be taken at any time, even when the image

is not in focus.

The Electronic Range Finder

If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or

faster, the viewﬁnder focus indicator can be used

to conﬁrm whether the subject in the selected fo-

cus area is in focus. After positioning the subject

in the active focus area, press the shutter-release

button halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring

until the in-focus indicator (●) is displayed.

A-M Selection/Autofocus with Manual Priority

When using a lens that offers A-M selection, select M when focusing manually. With

lenses that support M/A (autofocus with manual priority), focus can be adjusted man-

ually with the lens set to M or M/A. See the documentation provided with your lens

for details.

Focal Plane Position

To determine the distance between your subject and

the camera, measure from the focal plane mark on the

camera body. The distance between the lens mounting

ﬂange and the focal plane is 46.5mm (1.83˝).

Exposure

Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure

Metering

The metering method determines how the camera sets exposure:

Method

Description

1,005-pixel RGB sensor sets exposure based on variety of information

from all areas of frame. With type G or D lens, camera uses 3D color

matrix metering II for natural results even when frame is dominated by

bright (white or yellow) or dark (black or dark green) colors. With other

CPU lenses, 3D range information is not included; instead, camera uses

color matrix metering II. Color matrix metering is available when focal

length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lens are speciﬁed using Non-

CPU lens data item in shooting menu ( 131; center-weighted metering

is used if focal length or aperture is not speciﬁed). Matrix metering will

not produce desired results with autoexposure lock ( 97) or exposure

compensation ( 99), but is recommended in most other situations.

3D color

matrix II/

Color

matrix II/

Color

matrix

Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to area in center

of frame (defaults to area shown by 8-mm reference circle in viewﬁnder).

Classic meter for portraits; recommended when using ﬁlters with an ex-

posure factor (ﬁlter factor) over 1× ( 249).^*

Center-

weighted

Camera meters circle 3mm (0.12˝) in diameter (approximately 2% of

frame). Circle is centered on current focus area (in group dynamic AF, on

center focus area of current group;

78), making it possible to meter

off-center subjects (if non-CPU lens is used or if dynamic-area AF with

closest subject priority is in effect, camera will meter center focus area).

Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is

much brighter or darker.^*

Spot

*For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and maximum

aperture in Non-CPU lens data menu ( 131).

Before shooting, press the metering selector lock

button and rotate the metering selector to choose

a method suited to the composition and lighting

conditions, and conﬁrm your selection in the

viewﬁnder.

b6—Center Weight ( 194)

This option controls the size of the area assigned the greatest weight in center-

weighted metering.

Exposure Mode

Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture

when adjusting exposure. Four modes are available: programmed auto (P),

shutter-priority auto (S), aperture-priority auto (A), and manual (M).

CPU Lenses

When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the aperture ring at the

minimum aperture (highest f/-number). At other settings, the shutter release will be

disabled and a blinking

will appear in the aperture displays in the top control panel

and viewﬁnder. Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.

Depth-of-Field Preview

To preview the effects of aperture, press and hold the

depth-of-ﬁeld preview button. The lens will be stopped

down to the aperture value selected by the camera

(modes P and S) or the value chosen by the user (modes A and M), allowing depth of

ﬁeld to be previewed in the viewﬁnder.

b1—ISO Auto ( 191)

When Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) is on, the camera automatically varies ISO sensi-

tivity between ISO 100 equivalent and a maximum selected by the user to help ensure

optimum exposure. In exposure modes P and A, the camera adjusts ISO sensitivity

when the shutter speed needed to obtain optimum exposure would be faster than

8,000 s or slower than a speciﬁed value. Otherwise the camera adjusts ISO sensitiv-

ity when the limits of the camera exposure metering system are exceeded (mode S)

or when optimum exposure can not be achieved at the shutter speed and aperture

selected by the user (mode M). When ISO sensitivity is altered from the value selected

by the user, ISO-AUTO will ﬂash in the rear control panel and a ﬂashing ISO-A will be

displayed in the viewﬁnder. Note that noise is more likely to appear in photographs

taken at higher ISO sensitivities.

On can not be selected for ISO auto when ISO sensitivity is set to a value over ISO 800;

similarly, values over ISO 800 can not be selected when ISO auto is on.

b7—Fine-Tune Exposure ( 194)

Optimal exposure can be ﬁne-tuned separately for each metering method (note that

the exposure compensation icon is not displayed when exposure is ﬁne-tuned).

e4—Modeling Flash ( 202)

This setting controls whether the SB-800, SB-600, and other optional ﬂash units that

support the Creative Lighting System (CLS; 108) will emit a modeling ﬂash when the

depth-of-ﬁeld preview button is pressed.

P: Programmed Auto

In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture

according to a built-in program (see below) for optimal exposure in most

situations. This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in

which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture.

Adjustments can be made using ﬂexible program, exposure compensation

(

99), and auto exposure bracketing ( 100). Programmed auto is only

available with CPU lenses.

To take photographs in programmed auto:

Press the

button and rotate the main com-

mand dial until P is displayed in the viewﬁnder

and top control panel.

Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

Non-CPU Lenses

Exposure mode A (aperture-priority auto) is automatically selected when a non-CPU

lens is attached. The exposure mode indicator (P) in the top control panel will blink

and A will be displayed in the viewﬁnder. For more information, see “Aperture-Priority

Auto” ( 92).

Exposure Warning

If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, one of the following indi-

cators will be displayed in the control panel and viewﬁnder:

Indicator

Description

Subject too bright. Use optional Neutral Density (ND) ﬁlter or lower ISO sensitivity (

52).

Subject too dark. Use optional Speedlight or raise ISO sensitivity ( 52).

Flexible Program

In programmed auto, different combinations of shutter

speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main

command dial (“ﬂexible program”). All combinations

produce the same exposure. While ﬂexible program is

in effect, an asterisk (“*”) appears next to the exposure-

mode indicator in the top control panel. To restore default shutter speed and aperture

settings, rotate the main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed.

Default settings can also be restored by turning the camera off, selecting another

exposure mode, performing a two-button reset ( 136), or choosing another setting

for Custom Setting b3 (EV step;

192).

Exposure Program

The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph:

ISO 100; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and mini-

mum aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF 50mm f/1.4 D)

F1.4

F2.8

F5.6

F11

F16

F22

F32

30" 15"

4" 2" 1"

15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

Shutter speed

The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity; the above graph

assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent. When matrix metering is used, values

over 16¹3 EV are reduced to 16¹

/3 EV.

S: Shutter-Priority Auto

In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera

automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure.

Shutter speed can be set to values between 30s and ^{1 8,000}s. Use slow shutter

speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects, high shutter speeds to

“freeze” motion. Shutter-priority auto is only available with CPU lenses.

To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:

Press the

button and rotate the main com-

mand dial until S is displayed in the viewﬁnder

and top control panel.

Rotate the main command dial to choose the

desired shutter speed.

Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

Non-CPU Lenses

Exposure mode A (aperture-priority auto) is automatically selected when a non-CPU

lens is attached. The exposure mode indicator (S) in the top control panel will blink

and A will be displayed in the viewﬁnder. For more information, see “Aperture-Priority

Auto” ( 92).

Changing from Manual to Shutter-Priority Auto

If you select a shutter speed of

ter-priority auto without changing the shutter speed, the

in manual exposure mode and then select shut-

indicator in the shutter-

speed display will ﬂash and the shutter can not be released. Rotate the main command

dial to select a different shutter speed before shooting.

Exposure Warning

If the camera is unable to produce the correct exposure at the selected shutter speed,

the electronic analog exposure display ( 95) in the viewﬁnder will show the amount

of under- or over-exposure and one of the following indicators will be displayed in the

control panel and viewﬁnder aperture displays:

Indicator

Description

Subject too bright. Choose faster shutter speed or lower ISO sensitivity ( 52), or use

optional Neutral Density (ND) ﬁlter.

Subject too dark. Choose slower shutter speed or higher ISO sensitivity ( 52), or use

optional Speedlight.

Shutter-Speed Lock

Shutter speed can be locked at the selected setting ( 96).

Long Exp. NR ( 175)

To reduce noise at shutter speeds of about ½s or slower, select On for the Long exp.

NR option in the shooting menu. Note that noise and color distortion increase with

temperature.

b3—EV Step ( 192)

This option controls whether changes to shutter speed and aperture are made in incre-

ments equivalent to ¹

3 EV (the default setting), ½ EV, or 1 EV.

f6—Command Dials>Change main/sub ( 210)

This option can be used to reverse the roles of the command dials so that the sub-com-

mand dial controls shutter speed, while the main command dial controls aperture.

A: Aperture-Priority Auto

In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera auto-

matically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure.

Small apertures (high f/-numbers) increase depth of ﬁeld, bringing both the

main subject and background into focus. Large apertures (low f/-numbers)

soften background details and let more light into the camera, increasing the

range of the ﬂash and making photographs less susceptible to blurring.

To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:

Press the

button and rotate the main com-

mand dial until A is displayed in the viewﬁnder

and top control panel.

Rotate the sub-command dial to choose the

desired aperture.

Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

Non-CPU Lenses

If the maximum aperture of the lens has been speciﬁed

using the Non-CPU lens data item in shooting menu

(

131) when a non-CPU lens is attached, the current

f/-number will be displayed in the viewﬁnder and top

control panel, rounded to the nearest full stop. Other-

wise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops ( , with maximum ap-

erture displayed as

) and the f/-number must be read from the lens aperture ring.

Exposure Warning

If the camera is unable to produce the correct exposure at the selected aperture, the

electronic analog exposure display ( 95) in the viewﬁnder will show the amount of

under- or over-exposure and one of the following indicators will be displayed in the

control panel and viewﬁnder shutter-speed displays:

Indicator

Description

Subject too bright. Choose smaller aperture (larger f/-number) or lower ISO sensitivity

(

52), or use optional Neutral Density (ND) ﬁlter.

Subject too dark. Choose larger aperture (smaller f/-number) or higher ISO sensitivity

52), or use optional Speedlight.

(

Aperture Lock

Aperture can be locked at the selected setting ( 96).

b3—EV Step ( 192)

This option controls whether changes to shutter speed and aperture are made in incre-

ments equivalent to ¹

3 EV (the default setting), ½ EV, or 1 EV.

f6—Command Dials ( 210)

Command dials>Change main/sub and Command dials>Aperture setting con-

trol whether aperture is assigned with the main command dial, the sub-command dial,

or the lens aperture ring. Regardless of the settings chosen, the command dials are

always used with type G lenses, the lens aperture ring with non-CPU lenses.

M: Manual

In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture.

Shutter speed can be set to values between 30s and 8,000 s, or the shutter

can be held open indeﬁnitely for a long time-exposure (

). Aperture can

be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens.

Using the electronic analog exposure display in the viewﬁnder, you can adjust

exposure according to shooting conditions and the task at hand.

To take photographs in manual exposure mode:

Press the

button and rotate the main

command dial until M is displayed in the view-

ﬁnder and top control panel.

Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-

command dial to set aperture. Check exposure in the electronic analog

exposure displays (see right), and continue to adjust shutter speed and

aperture until the desired exposure is achieved.

Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

Long Time-Exposures

At a shutter speed of

, the shutter will remain open while the shutter-release

button is held down. Nikon recommends using a fully-charged EN-EL4a battery or an

optional EH-6 AC adapter to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open. Note that

if the shutter is open for more than approximately ½s at any setting, “noise” in the

form of randomly-spaced, brightly-colored pixels may appear in the ﬁnal photograph.

AF Micro Nikkor Lenses

Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need only be

taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture.

Non-CPU Lenses

If the maximum aperture of the lens has been speci-

ﬁed using the Non-CPU lens data item in shooting

menu (

131) when a non-CPU lens is attached,

the current f/-number will be displayed in the view-

ﬁnder and top control panel, rounded to the near-

est full stop. Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops

(

, with maximum aperture displayed as

) and the f/-number must be read from

the lens aperture ring.

Electronic Analog Exposure Displays

The electronic analog exposure displays in the top control panel and viewﬁnder show

whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings. De-

pending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b3 (EV step), the amount of under-

or over-exposure is shown in increments of

3 EV, ½ EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of the

exposure metering system are exceeded, the displays will ﬂash.

“EV step” set to “1/3 step”

View-

“EV step” set to “1/2 step”

View-

“EV step” set to “1 step”

View-

Top control panel ﬁnder

Top control panel

ﬁnder

Top control panel

ﬁnder

Optimal exposure

Underexposed by ¹

3 EV

Underexposed by ½EV

Underexposed by 1EV

Overexposed by more than 3EV^*

*At 1/3 step,

appears in the viewﬁnder when overexposure exceeds 2EV.

Long Exp. NR ( 175)

To reduce noise at shutter speeds of about ½s or slower, select On for the Long exp.

NR option in the shooting menu. Note that noise and color distortion increase with

temperature.

b3—EV Step ( 192)

This option controls whether changes to shutter speed and aperture are made in incre-

ments equivalent to ¹

3 EV (the default setting), ½ EV, or 1 EV.

f6—Command Dials ( 210)

Command dials>Change main/sub and Command dials>Aperture setting con-

trol whether aperture is assigned with the main command dial, the sub-command dial,

or the lens aperture ring. Regardless of the settings chosen, the command dials are

always used with type G lenses, the lens aperture ring with non-CPU lenses.

Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock

The button can be used to lock shutter speed at the value selected in shut-

ter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, or to lock aperture at the value

selected in aperture-priority auto and manual exposure modes. Lock is not

available in programmed auto.

Shutter-Speed Lock

To lock shutter speed at the selected value, press the button and rotate the

main command dial until shutter-speed lock icons appear in the viewﬁnder

and the top control panel.

To unlock shutter speed, press the

button and rotate the main command

dial until the lock icons disappear from the displays.

Aperture Lock

To lock aperture at the selected value, press the

button and rotate the

sub-command dial until aperture lock icons appear in the viewﬁnder and the

top control panel.

To unlock aperture, press the

button and rotate the sub-command dial

until the lock icons disappear from the displays.

Autoexposure Lock

When center-weighted metering is used, an area in the center of the frame

is assigned the greatest weight when determining exposure. Similarly, when

spot metering is used, exposure is based upon lighting conditions in the se-

lected focus area. If the subject is not in the metered area when the picture

is taken, exposure will be based on lighting conditions in the background,

and the main subject may be under- or over-exposed. To prevent this, use

autoexposure lock:

Select center-weighted or spot metering. If

using center-weighted metering, select the

center focus area with the multi selector (

76).

Position the subject in the selected focus area and press the shutter-re-

lease button halfway. With the shutter-release button pressed halfway

and the subject positioned in the focus area, press the AE-L/AF-L button

to lock exposure (and focus, except in manual focus mode). Conﬁrm that

the in-focus indicator (●) appears in the viewﬁnder.

While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will appear in the

viewﬁnder.

Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button pressed, recompose the photograph and

shoot.

Metered Area

In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 3-mm (0.12in.)

circle centered on the selected focus area. In center-weighted metering, exposure will

be locked at the value metered in the center of the viewﬁnder (the default area for

center-weighted metering is shown by the 8-mm circle in the viewﬁnder).

Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture

While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be changed without altering

the metered value for exposure:

Exposure mode

Programmed auto

Shutter-priority auto

Aperture-priority auto

Settings

Shutter speed and aperture (ﬂexible program;

Shutter speed

89)

Aperture

The new values can be conﬁrmed in the viewﬁnder and control panel. Note that the

metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect (changes to

metering take effect when the lock is released).

c1—AE Lock ( 195)

If + release button is selected for AE lock, exposure will lock when the shutter-release

button is pressed halfway.

c2—AE-L/AF-L ( 195)

Depending on the option selected, the AE-L/AF-L button locks both focus and exposure

(the default setting), only focus, or only exposure. Options are available for keeping

exposure locked until the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed a second time, the shutter is

released, or exposure meters turn off.

Exposure Compensation

To obtain the desired results with certain subject compositions, it may be

necessary to use exposure compensation to alter exposure from the value

suggested by the camera. As a rule of thumb, positive compensation may

be needed when the main subject is darker than the background, negative

values when the main subject is brighter than the background.

Pressing the

button, rotate the main

command dial and conﬁrm exposure com-

pensation in the top control panel or the

viewﬁnder (in the viewﬁnder, positive values

are shown by a

icon, negative values by a

icon). Exposure compensation can be set

to values between –5EV (underexposure) and

+5EV (overexposure) in increments of ^{1 3}EV.

0EV (

button pressed)

–0.3EV

At values other than 0, the 0 at the center

of the electronic analog exposure displays

will ﬂash and a

the control panel and viewﬁnder after you

release the button. The current value for

icon will be displayed in

+2.0EV

exposure compensation can be conﬁrmed in

the electronic analog exposure display or by

pressing the

button.

Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.

Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 or

performing a two button reset ( 136). Exposure compensation is not reset

when the camera is turned off.

b4—Exposure Comp. EV ( 193)

Use this option to set the increments for exposure compensation to ½ or 1EV.

b5—Exposure Comp. ( 193)

If desired, exposure compensation can be set without pressing the

button.

Bracketing

The D2Xs offers three types of bracketing: exposure bracketing, ﬂash brack-

eting, and white balance bracketing. In exposure bracketing, the camera

varies exposure compensation with each shot, while in the case of ﬂash

bracketing, ﬂash level is varied with each shot (i-TTL and auto aperture ﬂash

control modes only;

108, 109). Only one photograph is produced each

time the shutter is released, meaning that several shots (up to nine) are re-

quired to complete the bracketing sequence. Exposure and ﬂash bracketing

are recommended in situations in which it is difﬁcult to set exposure and there

is not enough time to check results and adjust settings with each shot.

In white balance bracketing, the camera creates multiple images each time

the shutter is released, each with a different white balance adjustment (

105). Only one shot is required to complete the bracketing sequence. White

balance bracketing is recommended when shooting under mixed lighting or

experimenting with different white balance settings. White balance bracket-

ing is not available at white-balance settings of

(Choose color temp.) or

(preset) or at image qualities of NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW)+JPEG ﬁne,

NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal, or NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic.

Exposure and Flash Bracketing

Select the type of bracketing to be performed

using Custom Setting e5 (Auto BKT set;

203). Choose AE & ﬂash to vary both ex-

posure and ﬂash level (the default setting), AE

only to vary only exposure, or Flash only to

vary only ﬂash level.

Pressing the

button, rotate the main command dial to choose the

number of shots in the bracketing sequence ( 102–104). At settings

other than zero, a BKT icon and bracketing indicator will be displayed in

the top control panel, and a BKT icon will appear in the viewﬁnder.

100

Pressing the

button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose the

exposure increment ( 102–104).

Compose a photograph, focus, and shoot. The camera will vary ex-

posure and/or ﬂash level shot-by-shot according to the bracketing pro-

gram selected. Modiﬁcations to exposure are added to those made with

exposure compensation ( 99), making it possible to achieve exposure

compensation values of more than 5EV.

While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be

displayed in the top control panel. A segment will disappear from the

indicator after each shot.

To cancel bracketing, press the

mand dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero

and is no longer displayed in the control panel on top of the camera.

button and rotate the main com-

The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is

activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button

reset ( 136), although in this case the bracketing program will not be

restored the next time bracketing is activated. Selecting WB bracketing

for Custom Setting e5 cancels the current the bracketing program.

Shooting Mode

In single frame and self-timer modes, one shot will be taken each time the shutter-

release button is pressed. In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes,

shooting will pause after the number of shots speciﬁed in the bracketing program have

been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.

e8—Auto BKT Selection ( 205)

If desired, the main command dial can be used to turn bracketing on and off and the

sub-command dial to select both the number of shots and the exposure increment.

101

The bracketing programs available depend on the option selected for Cus-

tom Setting b3 (EV step; 192).

1/3 Step Selected for EV Step

Control panel

display

No. of Exposure

shots increment

Bracketing

order (EVs)

3 EV

+0.3, 0, +0.7

+0.7, 0, +1.3

3 EV

+1EV

+1.0, 0, +2.0

–

3 EV

–0.3, –0.7, 0

3 EV

–0.7, –1.3, 0

–1EV

–1.0, –2.0, 0

3 EV

0, +0.3

3 EV

0, +0.7

+1EV

0, +1.0

–

3 EV

0, –0.3

3 EV

0, –0.7

–1EV

0, –1.0

3 EV

0, –0.3, +0.3

3 EV

0, –0.7, +0.7

1EV

0, –1.0, +1.0

3 EV

0, –0.7, –0.3, +0.3, +0.7

0, –1.3, –0.7, +0.7, +1.3

0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0

0, –1.0, –0.7, –0.3, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0

0, –2.0, –1.3, –0.7, +0.7, +1.3, +2.0

0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0

0,–1.3,–1.0,–0.7,–0.3,+0.3,+0.7,+1.0,+1.3

0,–2.7,–2.0,–1.3,–0.7,+0.7,+1.3,+2.0,+2.7

0,–4.0,–3.0,–2.0,–1.0,+1.0,+2.0,+3.0,+4.0

3 EV

1EV

3 EV

1EV

3 EV

1EV

102

1/2 Step Selected for EV Step

Control panel

display

No. of Exposure

shots increment

Bracketing

order (EVs)

+½EV

+1EV

–½EV

–1EV

+½EV

+1EV

–½EV

–1EV

½EV

1EV

+0.5, 0, +1.0

+1.0, 0, +2.0

–0.5, –1.0, 0

–1.0, –2.0, 0

0, +0.5

0, +1.0

0, –0.5

0, –1.0

0, –0.5, +0.5

0, –1.0, +1.0

½EV

1EV

0, –1.0, –0.5, +0.5, +1.0

0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0

0, –1.5, –1.0, –0.5, +0.5, +1.0, +1.5

0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0

0,–2.0,–1.5,–1.0,–0.5,+0.5,+1.0,+1.5,+2.0

0,–4.0,–3.0,–2.0,–1.0,+1.0,+2.0,+3.0,+4.0

½EV

1EV

½EV

1EV

103

1 Step Selected for EV Step

Control panel

display

No. of Exposure

shots increment

Bracketing

order (EVs)

+1EV

–1EV

+1EV

–1EV

1EV

+1.0, 0, +2.0

–1.0, –2.0, 0

0, +1.0

0, –1.0

0, –1.0, +1.0

1EV

0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0

0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0

0, –4.0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0, +4.0

1EV

Resuming Exposure or Flash Bracketing

If the memory card ﬁlls before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting

can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been

replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera

is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume

from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.

Exposure Bracketing

The camera modiﬁes exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (programmed

auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed (aperture-priority auto, manual

exposure mode). When On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) and no

Speedlight is attached, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum

exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded. If Custom

Setting e5 (Auto BKT set) is set AE only or to AE & Flash with no Speedlight at-

tached and On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto), the camera will vary ISO

sensitivity without varying shutter speed or aperture, regardless of the setting chosen

for Custom Setting e6 (see below).

e6—Manual Mode Bkting ( 204)

This option controls how the camera performs exposure and ﬂash bracketing in man-

ual exposure mode. Bracketing can be performed by varying ﬂash level together with

shutter speed and/or aperture, or by varying ﬂash level alone.

e7—Auto BKT Order ( 204)

This option can be used to change the bracketing order.

104

White Balance Bracketing

Choose WB bracketing for Custom Setting

e5 (Auto BKT set;

203).

Pressing the

button, rotate the main command dial to choose the

number of shots in the bracketing sequence ( 107). At settings other

than zero, a icon and bracketing indicator will appear in the top

control panel. The rear control panel will show and the view-

ﬁnder

If the number of shots in the bracketing pro-

gram is greater than the number of exposures

remaining, a ﬂashing icon will appear in the

top control panel and the frame count and

number of exposures remaining will ﬂash. A

ﬂashing

indicator will appear in the view-

ﬁnder and the shutter release will be disabled.

Shooting can begin when a new memory card

is inserted.

Pressing the

button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose the

white balance adjustment ( 107). Each increment is roughly equivalent

to 10 mired.

105

Compose a photograph, focus, and shoot. Each shot will be processed

to create the number of copies speciﬁed in the bracketing program, and

each copy will have a different white balance. Modiﬁcations to white

balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white

balance ﬁne-tuning ( 57).

To cancel bracketing, press the

button and rotate the main command

dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero and

white-balance bracketing indicators are no longer displayed in the control

panels and viewﬁnder. The program last in effect will be restored the next

time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by per-

forming a two-button reset ( 136), although in this case the bracketing

program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.

White Balance Bracketing

White balance bracketing is not available at white-balance settings of

(Choose

color temp.) or (preset) or at an image quality of NEF (RAW). Selecting NEF

(RAW), NEF (RAW)+JPEG ﬁne, NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal, or NEF (RAW)+JPEG

basic cancels white balance bracketing.

Shooting Mode

In single frame and self-timer modes, the number of copies speciﬁed in the white

balance program will be created each time the shutter is released. In continuous low

speed and continuous high speed modes, only one shot will be taken each time the

shutter-release button is pressed. Each shot will be processed to create the number of

copies speciﬁed in the bracketing program.

Turning the Camera Off

If the camera is turned off while the camera while the memory card access lamp is

lit, the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been

recorded. To turn the camera off without recording the remaining photographs, press

the button while turning the camera off (keep the button pressed for at least one

second after turning the camera off).

e8—Auto BKT Selection ( 205)

If desired, the main command dial can be used to turn bracketing on and off and the

sub-command dial to select both the number of shots and the white-balance incre-

ment.

106

The number of shots, white balance (WB) increment, and bracketing order for

each of the possible white-balance bracketing programs is shown below.

Control panel

display

No. of

shots increment

Bracketing

order

–1

–2

–3

–1

–2

–3

+1, 0, +2

+2, 0, +4

+3, 0, +6

–1, –2, 0

–2, –4, 0

–3, –6, 0

0, +1

0, +2

0, +3

0, –1

0, –2

0, –3

0, –1, +1

0, –2, +2

0, –3, +3

0, –2, –1, +1, +2

0, –4, –2, +2, +4

0, –6, –3, +3, +6

0, –3, –2, –1, +1, +2, +3

0, –6, –4, –2, +2, +4, +6

0, –9, –6, –3, +3, +6, +9

0, –4, –3, –2, –1, +1, +2, +3, +4

0, –8, –6, –4, –2, +2, +4, +6, +8

0, –12, –9, –6, –3, +3, +6, +9, +12

e7—Auto BKT Order ( 204)

This option can be used to change the bracketing order.

107

Flash Photography

Using Optional Speedlights

The D2Xs supports ﬂash photography when an optional Speedlight is

mounted on the camera’s accessory shoe. A ﬂash can be used not only when

natural lighting is inadequate, but also to ﬁll in shadows, illuminate back-lit

subjects, and even to add a catch light to the eyes of a portrait subject.

Compatible Flash Units

The D2Xs can be used with the following types of Nikon ﬂash unit:

CLS-Compatible Flash Units (

108–109): The D2Xs supports the full range of

options available with optional ﬂash units that support the Nikon Creative Lighting

system (CLS), including i-TTL ﬂash control ( 108), Advanced Wireless Lighting, FV

lock ( 114), Auto FP High-Speed Sync, and Flash Color Information Communica-

tion ( 55). See the Speedlight manual for details.

• SB-800 and SB-600 Speedlights

• SB-R200 remote wireless Speedlight

• SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander

D-TTL Compatible Speedlights ( 110): Other Speedlights ( 111)

• SB-80DX • SB-28DX • SB-50DX

CLS-Compatible Flash Units: i-TTL Flash Control

When a CLS-compatible ﬂash unit is set to TTL, the camera automatically

selects one of the following types of ﬂash control:

i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Speedlight emits series of nearly invisible

preﬂashes (monitor preﬂashes) immediately before main ﬂash. Preﬂashes reﬂected

from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by ﬁve-segment TTL ﬂash control

sensor or 1,005-pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with information

from matrix metering system to adjust ﬂash output for natural balance between

main subject and ambient background lighting. If type G or D lens is used, distance

information is included when calculating ﬂash output. Precision of calculation can

be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length and maximum

aperture;

131–134). Not available when spot metering is used.

Standard i-TTL Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame

to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into account. Recom-

mended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background

details, or when exposure compensation is used. Standard i-TTL ﬂash for digital SLR

is activated automatically when spot metering is selected.

108

The following features are available with CLS-compatible ﬂash units:

Speedlight

Advanced Wireless Lighting

Flash

mode/feature

Commander

Remote

SB-800 SB-600 SB-800 SU-800¹SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200

i-TTL²

Auto aperture

Non-TTL auto

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

GN Range-priority manual

RPT

REAR

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

Manual

Repeating ﬂash

Rear-curtain sync

Red-eye reduction

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

Flash Color Information

Communication

✔

—

Auto FP High-Speed Sync⁵

FV Lock

✔

—

✔

AF-assist for multi-area AF⁶

Auto zoom

—

1 Options shown are only available when SU-800 is 4 Auto aperture selected automatically if CPU lens is

used to control other ﬂash units.

attached or non-CPU lens data have been speciﬁed

using Non-CPU lens data. If non-CPU lens is used

without specifying lens data, non-TTL auto will be

selected automatically.

2 Standard i-TTL for Digital SLR is used with spot meter-

ing or when selected with Speedlight. When using

non-CPU lens with i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital

SLR, improved precision can be obtained if lens data 5 Select 1/250 s (Auto FP) for Custom Setting e1

are speciﬁed in Non-CPU lens data menu.

(Flash sync speed; 201).

3 Use Speedlight controls to select ﬂash mode.

6 Requires CPU lens.

Modeling Illumination

CLS-compatible Speedlights such as the SB-800 and SB-600 emit a modeling ﬂash

when the camera depth-of-ﬁeld preview button is pressed. This feature can be used

with Advanced Wireless Lighting to preview the total lighting effect achieved with

multiple ﬂash units. Modeling illumination can be turned off using Custom Setting e4

(Modeling ﬂash;

202).

109

SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-50DX: D-TTL Flash Control

The type of ﬂash control used with the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX

depends on the lens attached:

Lens

Description

3D Multi-Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Speedlight emits series

of nearly invisible preﬂashes (monitor preﬂashes) immediately before main

ﬂash. Preﬂashes reﬂected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up

by ﬁve-segment TTL ﬂash control sensor and analyzed in combination with

range information from lens to adjust ﬂash output for natural balance be-

tween main subject and ambient background lighting. Not available when

spot metering is used.

Type

G or D

lens

Multi-Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: As above, except that

range information is not included in regulating ﬂash output. Precision of

calculation can be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (fo-

Other

lenses

cal length and maximum aperture;

metering is used.

131–134). Not available when spot

Standard TTL Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in

frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into account.

Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense

of background details, or when exposure compensation is used. Standard

TTL ﬂash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is

selected.

All

types

The following features are available:

Speedlight SB-80DX

Flash mode

SB-28DX SB-50DX

D-TTL¹

✔

—

✔

Auto aperture

Non-TTL auto

Manual

FP high-speed sync

Repeating ﬂash

1 Standard TTL Flash for Digital SLR is used with

spot metering. In other metering modes, ﬂash

control depends on lens type (see above).

2 Select On for Custom Setting e3 (AA ﬂash

mode; 202).

3 Select Off for Custom Setting e3 (AA ﬂash

mode; 202).

4 Set Speedlight to mode M and select FP high-

speed sync manually.

✔

—

✔

REAR Rear-curtain sync

Red-eye reduction

—

110

Other Speedlights

The following Speedlights can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes.

If they are set to TTL, the camera shutter-release button will lock and no

photographs can be taken.

Speedlight

SB-30

SB-22S

SB-23 SB-22

SB-29³SB-20

SB-21B³SB-16B SB-11⁴

SB-28

Flash mode

SB-26¹SB-27²SB-25 SB-24 SB-29S³SB-15 SB-14⁴

Non-TTL auto

Manual

FP high-speed sync

Repeating ﬂash

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

REAR Rear-curtain sync

Red-eye reduction

—

1 The SB-26 can be set to remote mode for wireless remote ﬂash photography. When the wireless remote selector

is set to D, shutter speed will be set to under ½00 s.

2 When an SB-27 is mounted on the D2Xs, the ﬂash mode is automatically set to TTL, and the shutter-release will

be disabled. Set the SB-27 to A (non-TTL auto ﬂash).

3 Autofocus is only available with AF-Micro lenses (60mm, 105mm, 200mm, or 70–180mm).

4 When using the SB-11 or SB-14 in A or M mode, use the SU-2 with an SC-13 sync cable. Although SC-11 and

SC-15 sync cables can be used, the ﬂash-ready indicator will not appear in the viewﬁnder and shutter speed will

not be adjusted automatically.

5 Set Speedlight to mode M and select FP high-speed sync manually.

Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories

Use only Nikon Speedlights. Negative voltages or voltages over 250V applied to the

accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry

of the camera or ﬂash. Before using a Nikon Speedlight not included in the list on

these pages, contact a Nikon-authorized service representative for more information.

ISO Auto

If a Speedlight is used when Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) is on, ISO sensitivity will be

ﬁxed at the value selected by the user.

111

Flash Sync Modes

The D2Xs supports the following ﬂash sync modes:

Flash sync mode

Description

This mode is recommended for most situations. In pro-

grammed auto and aperture-priority auto modes, shutter

speed will automatically be set to values between /60 and

½50 s (¹/60 to ¹/8,000 s with Auto FP High-Speed Sync).

Front-curtain sync

Flash is combined with speeds as slow as 30s to capture

both subject and background at night or under dim light.

This mode is only available in programmed auto and aper-

ture-priority auto exposure modes. Use of tripod is recom-

mended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake.

Slow sync

In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, ﬂash ﬁres

just before the shutter closes, creating effect of a stream

of light behind moving objects. In programmed auto and

aperture-priority auto, slow rear-curtain sync is used to cap-

ture both subject and background. Use of tripod is recom-

Rear-curtain sync

Slow rear-curtain sync mended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake.

In this mode (available only with SB-series 800, 600, 80DX,

28DX, 28, 27, 26, and 25 Speedlights), red-eye reduction

pre-ﬂash lights for approximately one second before main

ﬂash. Pupils in subject’s eyes to contract, reducing “red-eye”

effect sometimes caused by ﬂash.

Red-eye reduction

Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. This mode is

only available with SB-series 800, 600, 80DX, 28DX, 28, 27,

26, and 25 Speedlights in programmed auto and aperture-

priority auto exposure modes. Use of a tripod is recom-

mended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake.

Red-eye reduction

with slow sync

SB-Series 26, 25, and 24 Speedlights

Front- and rear-curtain sync modes for SB-series 26, 25, and 24 Speedlights are set

using the sync mode selector on the optional Speedlight. Camera red-eye reduction

settings take priority over mode selected with SB-26 and SB-25.

Studio Flash Systems

Rear-curtain sync can not be used with studio ﬂash systems, as the correct synchro-

nization can not be obtained.

112

To choose the ﬂash sync mode, press the

but-

ton and rotate the main command dial until the

desired ﬂash sync mode is selected in the top

control panel:

Front cur-

tain sync

Rear curtain

sync²

Slow sync¹

Red-eye reduction

with slow sync^{3, 4}

Red-eye

reduction³

1Available only in exposure modes P and A. In modes S and M, (front-curtain sync)

is selected when button is released.

2In exposure modes P and A, ﬂash-sync mode will be set to (slow rear-curtain sync)

when the button is released.

icon blinks if Speedlight does not support red-eye reduction.

4Red-eye reduction with slow sync is available only in exposure modes P and A. In

modes S and M, (red-eye reduction) is selected when the button is released.

Shutter Speed and Aperture

Shutter speed and aperture can be set as follows when a Speedlight is used:

Exposure mode

Programmed auto

Shutter-priority auto

Aperture-priority auto

Manual

Shutter speed

Set automatically by camera^{1, 2}

½50 s–30s²

Set automatically by camera^{1, 2}

½50 s–30s ²

Aperture

Set automatically by camera

Value selected by user³

1Set automatically in the range ½50 s–¹/60 s, or ½50 s–30s at ﬂash sync settings of slow

sync, slow rear-curtain sync, and red-eye reduction with slow sync.

If 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed) when an op-

tional SB-800 or SB-600 Speedlight is used, shutter speeds may be as fast as ¹/8,000 s.

3Flash range varies with aperture. When setting aperture in exposure modes A and

M, consult the table of ﬂash ranges provided with optional Speedlight.

e1—Flash Sync Speed ( 201)

This option can be used to enable Auto FP High-Speed Sync or limit the fastest sync

speed to a speed slower than ½50 s. To ﬁx shutter speed at the sync speed limit in ex-

posure modes S and M, select the setting after the slowest possible shutter speed (30s

). An X will be displayed in the ﬂash sync indicator in the top control panel.

e2—Flash Shutter Speed ( 201)

This option can be used to limit the slowest shutter speed possible when using an op-

tional Speedlight in programmed auto and aperture-priority auto exposure modes.

113

FV Lock

This feature is used to lock ﬂash output, allowing photographs to be recom-

posed without changing the ﬂash level and ensuring that ﬂash output is ap-

propriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center

of the frame. Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO

sensitivity, aperture, and Speedlight zoom head position. FV lock is available

with CLS compatible ﬂash units only.

To use FV lock:

Select FV lock for Custom Setting f4 (FUNC.

button;

208).

Mount an SB-800 or SB-600 Speedlight or SU-800 wireless Speedlight

commander on the camera accessory shoe.

Turn the Speedlight on and set the ﬂash mode to TTL or AA (see the

Speedlight instruction manual for details).

Position the subject in the center of the frame

and press the shutter-release button halfway

to focus.

Press the camera FUNC. button. The Speed-

light will emit a monitor preﬂash to determine

the appropriate ﬂash level. Flash output will be

locked at this level and FV lock icons (

and

) will appear in the control panel and

viewﬁnder.

114

Recompose the photograph and press the

shutter-release button the rest of the way

down to shoot. If desired, additional pictures

can be taken without releasing FV lock.

Press the camera FUNC. button to release

FV lock and conﬁrm that the FV lock icons

(

and

) are no longer displayed in

the control panel and viewﬁnder.

Metering

The metering areas for FV lock are as follows:

Speedlight

Flash mode

Metered area

5-mm circle in center of frame

Area metered by Speedlight exposure meter

Entire frame

TTL

Stand-alone ﬂash unit

Used with other ﬂash units

(Advanced Wireless

Lighting)

Area metered by Speedlight exposure meter

AA (master ﬂash)

115

Flash Contacts and Indicators

The D2Xs is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching Speedlights

directly to the camera and a sync terminal that allows Speedlights to be con-

nected via a sync cable. When a Speedlight is connected, the ﬂash-ready

indicator in the viewﬁnder shows whether the ﬂash is fully charged and ready

for use.

The Accessory Shoe

SB-series Speedlights, including the SB-800, 600,

80DX, 28DX, 50DX, 27, 23, 22s, and 29s, can

be mounted directly on the camera accessory

shoe without a sync cable. The accessory shoe is

equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a

locking pin (e.g., SB-series 80DX and 27).

The Sync Terminal

A sync cable can be connected to the sync

terminal as required. Do not connect another

Speedlight via a sync cable when performing rear-

curtain sync ﬂash photography with an SB-series

Speedlights such as the 800, 600, 80DX, 28DX,

50DX, 27, 23, 22s, or 29s mounted on the cam-

era accessory shoe.

The Flash-Ready Indicator

When an SB-series Speedlight such as the 800, 600, 80DX, 28DX, 50DX, 27,

23, 22s, or 29s is connected, the ﬂash-ready indicator will light when the

ﬂash is fully charged and ready for use. If the indicator blinks for approxi-

mately three seconds after a photograph is taken in i-TTL or D-TTL modes,

the ﬂash has ﬁred at full output and the photograph may be underexposed.

Check the results in the monitor. If the photograph is underexposed, adjust

the distance to the subject, aperture, or ﬂash range and try again.

116

Notes on Optional Speedlights

Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the Speedlight supports

i-TTL or D-TTL ﬂash control, refer to the entry for cameras that support the Creative

Lighting System (CLS) or for digital SLR cameras in the table of camera types.

If Auto FP High-Speed Sync is not used, the shutter will synchronize with an external

ﬂash at speeds of ½50 s or slower.

If the ﬂash-ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken

with i-TTL or D-TTL ﬂash control, the ﬂash has ﬁred at full power and the photograph

may be underexposed.

The SB-28DX displays exposure in increments of ¹/3 EV. If the camera is set to control

exposure in increments of ½EV using Custom Setting b2, the SB-28DX exposure dis-

play will not show the correct ISO value. The actual exposure value is not affected.

i-TTL and D-TTL ﬂash control can be used to adjust ﬂash output at ISO sensitivity set-

tings between 100 and 800. At settings over ISO 800, the desired results may not be

achieved at some ranges or aperture settings.

The AF-assist illuminator on CLS-compatible Speedlights will only light if all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met: focus mode is set to single-servo auto, an AF-Nikkor lens is

used, the subject is poorly lit, and the center focus area is selected or dynamic-area AF

is used in combination with closest-subject priority.

In programmed auto, the maximum aperture (minimum f/-number) is limited ac-

cording to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:

Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:

100

125

160

200

250

320

400

500

640

800

4.2

4.5

4.8

5.3

5.6

6.3

6.7

For each one-step increase in ISO sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture is stopped

down by half an f/-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given

above, the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.

When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera ﬂash photography,

correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL or D-TTL mode. We recommend that

you choose spot metering to select standard i-TTL or D-TTL ﬂash control. Take a test

shot and view the results in the monitor.

In i-TTL or D-TTL mode, use the ﬂash panel or bounce adapter provided with your

Speedlight. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce

incorrect exposure.

D-TTL ﬂash control can not be used for multi-ﬂash photography.

117

Overlay/Multiple Exposure

Combining Multiple Exposures in a Single Frame

The following options are available for combining multiple exposures in a

single frame:

• Image overlay: two existing RAW photographs are combined to form a

single picture which is saved separately from the originals. The originals

must be on the same memory card.

• Multiple exposure: a series of two to ten exposures is recorded as a single

photograph. The individual exposures are not saved separately.

Image Overlay

Overlays are created using the Image overlay option in the shooting menu.

The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings. Be-

fore creating an overlay, set image quality and size ( 45).

Highlight Image overlay in the shooting

menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to

the right.

A preview will be displayed with Image 1

highlighted.

Press the

button to view the RAW images

on the memory card. Press the multi selector

left or right to highlight images. To zoom in

on the highlighted image, press the

ton.

but-

Press the

button to select the highlighted

image and return to the preview display. The

selected image will appear as Image 1.

118

Press the multi selector up or down to select

a value for gain between 0.1 and 2.0. The

default value is 1.0; selecting 0.5 cuts gain in

half, while selecting 2.0 doubles gain. The ef-

fects of gain are visible in the preview image.

Press the multi selector left or right to highlight Image 2. Repeat steps

3–5 to select the second image and adjust gain.

Press the multi selector left or right to highlight

Overlay and press the

button to display a

conﬁrmation dialog (to save the new image

without displaying the conﬁrmation dialog,

highlight Save and press the button). Press

the button to save the new image, or the

button to return to the preview dialog.

Selecting Photographs for Image Overlay

Only RAW photographs taken with the D2Xs can be selected for image overlay. Other

images are not displayed in the thumbnail list. The two originals must be the same

size: if On is selected for Hi-speed crop, only RAW photographs taken with high-

speed crop on will be displayed; if Off is selected, only RAW photographs taken with

high-speed crop off will be displayed ( 41). Hidden images are not displayed and

can not be selected.

Image Overlay

The new image is recorded at current image quality, image size, and ﬁle name settings

under a ﬁle name assigned by adding one to the largest ﬁle number in the current

folder. White balance, sharpening, color space, color mode, and hue settings are

copied from the photograph selected for Image 1, as are the date of recording, me-

tering, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, exposure compensation, focal length,

orientation, and other photo information. Voice memos are not copied and must be

recorded separately for the new image.

119

Multiple Exposure

To create a multiple exposure:

Highlight Multiple exposure in the shooting

menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to

the right.

Press the multi selector up or down to high-

light Number of shots and press the multi

selector to the right.

Press the multi selector up or down to choose

the number of exposures that will be com-

bined to form a single photograph. Press

the multi selector to the right to return to the

multiple exposure menu.

Press the multi selector up or down to high-

light Auto gain and press the multi selector

to the right.

Press the multi selector up or down to high-

light one of the following options and then

press the multi selector to the right.

Option

Description

Gain adjusted according to number of

exposures actually recorded (gain for

each exposure is set to ½ for 2 expo-

sures, ¹/3 for 3 exposures, etc.).

(default)

Gain is not adjusted when recording

multiple exposure.

Off

120

Press the multi selector up or down to high-

light Done and press the multi selector to the

right. A

icon will be displayed in the top

control panel.

Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. In

continuous high-speed or continuous low-

speed mode ( 43), the camera will record

all exposures in a single burst. In single-frame

shooting mode, one photograph will be taken each time the shutter-re-

lease button is pressed; continue shooting until all exposures have been

recorded. Shooting will end automatically if:

•No operations are performed for 30s during shooting, or for 30s after

the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations

•The user selects Reset or Cancel in the mul-

tiple exposure menu and presses the multi

selector to the right

•The camera is turned off

•The battery is exhausted

•Pictures are deleted

If shooting ends before the speciﬁed number of exposures have been

taken, a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have

been recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will be adjusted

to reﬂect the number of exposures actually recorded. To end shooting

without creating a multiple exposure, press the button while turning

the camera off.

The

When shooting ends, multiple exposure mode

will end and the icon will no longer be dis-

icon will blink until shooting ends.

played. Repeat steps 1–7 to take additional

multiple exposures.

121

Exchanging Memory Cards

Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure.

Photo Info

The information listed in the playback photo information display (including date of

recording and camera orientation) is for the ﬁrst shot in the multiple exposure.

Voice Memos

The camera stores only the last voice memo created during a multiple exposure.

Auto Meter Off

Unless No limit is selected for Custom Setting c3 (Auto meter-off;

196) or the

camera is powered by an AC adapter, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be

recorded if no operations are performed for 30s. To prevent the exposure meters from

turning off before the 30s limit has expired, 30s are added to the auto meter-off delay

when shooting starts. The existing meter-off delay is restored when shooting ends.

White Balance ( 55)

If Auto is selected for white balance, white balance will be ﬁxed at a value equivalent

to Direct sunlight while multiple exposure mode is in effect. Only use Auto if the

subject is in direct sunlight.

Interval Timer Photography

If interval timer photography is activated before the ﬁrst exposure is taken, the camera

will record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures speciﬁed in

the multiple exposure menu have been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval

timer shooting menu is ignored). These exposures will then be recorded as a single

photograph and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting will end. Note

that unless No limit is selected for Custom Setting c3 (Auto meter-off; 196) or the

camera is powered by an AC adapter, shooting will end automatically if no operations

are performed for 30s; when recording a multiple exposure using the interval timer,

choose an interval of less than 30s, select No limit for Custom Setting c3 (Auto me-

ter-off;

196), or use an AC adapter. Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval

timer shooting.

Bracketing and Other Settings

Bracketing is cancelled when multiple exposure is selected and can not be restored

until shooting has ended. Settings that can not be changed during a multiple exposure

can not be selected once the ﬁrst picture has been taken.

Two Button Reset ( 136)

Multiple exposure settings are not affected when a two-button reset is performed.

Performing a two-button reset does not cancel multiple exposure mode.

122

Trimming Photographs

Creating Cropped Copies

To create a cropped copy of an existing photograph:

Highlight Trim in the shooting menu ( 168)

and press the multi selector to the right.

Press the multi selector up, down, left, or right

to highlight the desired image. To view the

highlighted image full frame, press the but-

ton.

Press the center of the multi selector to select

the highlighted image. The selected image

will be displayed full frame.

Press the

button and rotate the main com-

mand dial to choose the size of the crop. To

change the position of the crop, press the

multi selector up, down, left, or right while

the button is pressed.

Trimming

Trimming is available only with photographs taken with the D2Xs. The D2Xs can not

be used to tirm photographs taken with other cameras. If a photograph taken at a

setting of NEF (RAW) + JPEG is selected, trimming will apply to the NEF (RAW) image.

Cropped copies can not be selected for trimming.

123

Press the

button to create a cropped copy

of the image, or press the button to return

to the shooting menu without creating a copy.

Cropped copies are saved as FINE-quality JPEG

images named by adding one to the current

ﬁle number. Depending on the size of the

crop, copies will be 2,540×1,920, 1,920×1,440, 1,280×960, 960×720,

or 640×480 pixels in size. Cropped copies have the same white balance,

shooting data, and image optimization settings as the original. Camera

orientation ( 167) is not copied to the new ﬁle, with the result that all

cropped copies are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation during

playback. Any voice memos associated with the original are not copied.

124

Interval Timer Photography

Taking Photographs at Preset Intervals

The D2Xs is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals.

Highlight Intvl timer shooting in the shoot-

ing menu ( 168) and press the multi selector

to the right.

Press the multi selector left or right to high-

light options and press the multi selector up or

down to change interval timer settings. The

following options are available:

Option

Description

Choose starting for interval timer photography from:

• Now: Shooting begins about 3s after this option is selected

• Start time: Shooting begins at Start time

Start

Enter start time for interval timer photography when Start time

is selected for Start. Press multi selector left or right to highlight

starting hour or minute, press up or down to change. Not avail-

able when Now is selected for Start.

Start time

Interval

Enter time between shots. Press multi selector left or right to

highlight hour, minute, or second, press up or down to change.

Note that camera will not be able to take photographs at speci-

ﬁed interval if interval is shorter than shutter speed or time re-

quired to record images.

Choose number of intervals and number of shots taken at each

interval. Press multi selector left or right to highlight number of

intervals or number of shots, press up or down to change. Total

number of shots that will be taken appears to right.

Select intvl

× no. of

shots

Remaining Shows number of intervals and total shots remaining in current

(intvl × shots) interval program. This item can not be edited.

Choose Off to exit without starting interval timer. To start inter-

val timer, select On and press . Shooting will start at selected

start time and will continue for speciﬁed number of intervals.

Start

125

Highlight Start at the bottom of the interval timer menu and press the

multi selector up or down to select On, then press the button. The

ﬁrst series of shots will be taken at the speciﬁed starting time. Shooting

will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken. If

shooting can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a shutter

speed of

is currently selected in manual exposure mode, or the

starting time is less than one minute from the current time), a warning

will appear and the interval timer menu will be displayed again.

Use of a tripod is recommended.

Take a Test Shot

Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and

view the results in the monitor. Remember that the camera will focus before each

shot—no shots will be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF.

Use a Reliable Power Source

To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the battery is fully charged. If in

doubt, charge the battery before shooting or use an optional EH-6 AC adapter.

Check the Time

Before choosing a starting time, select World Time in the setup menu and make sure

that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date ( 18).

Out of Memory

If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be

taken. Delete some pictures or turn the camera off and insert another memory card.

When the camera is turned on, interval timer photography will be paused. See “Paus-

ing Interval Timer Photography” on the following page for information on resuming

interval timer photography.

Bracketing

Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography. If exposure

and/or ﬂash bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the cam-

era will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval, regardless

of the number of shots speciﬁed in the interval timer menu. If white balance brack-

eting is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take the

number of shots speciﬁed in the interval timer menu and process each shot to create

the number of copies speciﬁed in the bracketing program.

The Viewﬁnder Eyepiece

In exposure modes other than manual, close the view-

ﬁnder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via the

viewﬁnder from interfering with exposure.

126

During Shooting

During interval timer photography, the

icon in the top control panel will blink. Imme-

diately before the next shooting interval begins,

the shutter speed display will show the number of

intervals remaining, and the aperture display will

show the number of shots remaining in the current interval. At other times,

the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval

can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button halfway (once the but-

ton is released, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the

exposure meters turn off).

To view current interval timer settings, select Intvl

timer shooting between shots. While interval

timer photography is in progress, the interval tim-

er menu will show the starting time, the current

time, the shooting interval, the selected number

of intervals and number of shots, and the number

of intervals and shots remaining. None of these items can be changed while

interval timer photography is in progress.

During Shooting

Shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is

in progress. Note the following:

• Performing a two-button reset ( 136) or changing bracketing settings ( 100) will

cancel interval timer photography.

• If shutter speed is set to

(manual exposure mode) after the timer has started,

subsequent photographs will be taken at a shutter speed of ¹/3 s.

• The monitor will turn off about four seconds before each interval.

• If voice memos are recorded automatically after shooting, voice memos will end two

seconds before the next photograph is taken.

Maximum shots

If the number of shots per interval is greater than the limit speciﬁed in Custom Setting

d2 (Maximum shots), only the number of shots speciﬁed in Custom Setting d2 will

be taken at each interval.

127

Pausing Interval Timer Photography

To pause interval timer photography:

Press the multi selector left or right to high-

light Start at the bottom of the interval timer

menu.

Press the multi selector up or down to select

Pause and press the

button.

Interval time photography can also be paused by:

• Pressing the

button between intervals.

• Turning the camera off (if desired, the memory

card can be replaced while the camera is off).

Interval timer photography will be paused when the camera is turned on.

When shooting is paused, the start time will be reset to Now. A new starting

time can be selected as described in Step 2 of “Interval Timer Photography”

(

125). The interval, number of intervals, and number of shots can not be

changed. If interval timer photography is paused during shooting, any shots

remaining in the current interval will be cancelled.

Press the multi selector left or right to highlight Start at the bottom of

the interval timer menu (see above).

Press the multi selector up or down to select Restart and press the

button.

No Photograph

Photographs will not be taken if the self-timer is in operation or the previous photo-

graph has yet to be taken, the memory buffer or memory card is full, or the camera

is unable to focus in single-servo AF (note that the camera focuses again before each

shot).

Multiple Exposure

Interval timer shooting can be used to create a multiple exposure ( 120).

128

Interrupting Interval Timer Photography

To interrupt interval timer photography:

Press the multi selector left or right to highlight Start at the bottom of

the interval timer menu (see previous page).

Press the multi selector up or down to select Done and press the

ton.

but-

Interval timer photography will also be interrupted if:

• A two button reset is performed ( 136).

• Reset shooting menu is selected in the shooting menu ( 171).

• Bracketing settings are changed ( 100).

• The battery is exhausted.

Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends.

Shooting Mode

Regardless of the shooting mode selected, the camera will take the speciﬁed number of

shots at each interval. In CH (continuous high speed) mode, photographs will be taken

at a rate of ﬁve shots per second (eight shots per second when high-speed crop is on). In

S (single frame), CL (continuous low-speed), and M-UP (mirror up) modes, photographs

will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d1 (Shooting speed;

197). In

(self-timer) mode, the shutter-release delay applies to each photograph taken. In

M-UP mode, the mirror will be raised automatically immediately before each shot.

Shooting Menu Banks

Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks ( 169). If shoot-

ing menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting menu item in the shooting

menu ( 171), interval timer settings will be reset as follows:

• Start time: Now

• Interval: 00:01´:00˝

• Number of intervals: 1

• Number of shots: 1

• Start: Off

129

Self-Timer Mode

Delaying Shutter Release

The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-portraits. To

use the self-timer:

Mount the camera on a tripod (recommended) or place the camera on a

stable, level surface.

Press the shooting mode dial lock release and

rotate the shooting mode dial to select

(self-timer mode).

Frame the photograph and focus. If autofo-

cus is in effect, be sure not to block the lens

when activating the self-timer. In single-servo

autofocus ( 74), photographs can only be

taken if the in-focus (●) indicator appears in

the viewﬁnder.

Close the Viewﬁnder Eyepiece Shutter

In exposure modes other than manual, close

the viewﬁnder eyepiece shutter after focusing.

This prevents light entering via the viewﬁnder

from interfering with exposure.

Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the self-timer.

The self-timer lamp will start to blink, stopping two seconds before the

photograph is taken.

To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the mode dial

to another setting.

In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of

is equivalent to approximately ¹/3 s.

c4—Self-timer ( 196)

Self-timer delay can be set to 2s, 5s, 10s (the default setting), or 20s.

130

Non-CPU Lenses

Specifying Lens Data

By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user

can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using a non-CPU

lens. If the focal length of the lens is known:

• Automatic power zoom can be used with attached Speedlights

• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info dis-

play

When the maximum aperture of the lens is known:

• The aperture value is displayed in the top control panel and viewﬁnder

• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture

• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display

Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:

• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to use center-

weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses,

including Reﬂex-Nikkor lenses)

• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering, i-TTL Bal-

anced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR, and Multi-Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for

Digital SLR

Specifying Lens Focal Length

Lens focal length can be speciﬁed using the Non-CPU lens data option in

the shooting menu or by pressing the FUNC. button and rotating the main

command dial. The following settings are available:

• 6–45mm: 6, 8, 13, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 35, 43, and 45mm

• 50–180mm: 50, 55, 58, 70, 80, 85, 86, 100, 105, 135, and 180mm

• 200–4000mm: 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400,

1600, 2000, 2400, 2800, 3200, and 4000mm

The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu

Highlight Non-CPU lens data in the shooting

menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to

the right.

Focal Length Not Listed

If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater than the actual

focal length of the lens.

131

Highlight Focal length (mm) and press the

multi selector to the right.

Select the group to which the lens belongs

from 6-45mm, 50-180mm, 200-4000mm

and press the multi selector to the right.

Select the lens focal length (in mm) and press

the multi selector to the right.

The FUNC. Button

Select Non-CPU lens data for Custom Set-

ting f5 (FUNC. + command;

209).

Press the FUNC. button and rotate the main

command dial. Focal length is displayed in the

top control panel:

…

Default Maximum Aperture

Selecting a focal length sets Maximum aperture to the last value selected at that

focal length.

132

Specifying Maximum Aperture

Lens maximum aperture can be speciﬁed using the Non-CPU lens data op-

tion in the shooting menu or by pressing the FUNC. button and rotating the

sub-command dial. The following f/-numbers are available:

• 1.2, 1.4, 1.8, 2, 2.5, 2.8, 3.3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.6, 6.3, 7.1, 8, 9.5, 11, 13,15,

16, 19, 22

The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu

Highlight Non-CPU lens data in the shooting

menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to

the right.

Highlight Maximum aperture and press the

multi selector to the right.

Select the f/-number corresponding to the

maximum lens aperture and press the multi

selector to the right.

Zoom Lenses

Lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out. After changing

the zoom position, select new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture.

133

The FUNC. Button

Select Non-CPU lens data for Custom Set-

ting f5 (FUNC. + command;

209).

Press the FUNC. button and rotate the sub-

command dial. Maximum aperture is dis-

played in the top control panel:

…

134

Using a GPS Unit

Recording GPS Data

Garmin and Magellan GPS units that conform to version 2.01 of the National

Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data format can be connected

to the camera’s ten-pin remote terminal using an MC-35 GPS adapter cord

(available separately;

251), allowing information on the camera’s current

position to be recorded when photographs are taken. Operation has been

conﬁrmed with the following devices:

• Garmin eTrex series equipped with a PC interface cable connector

• Magellan SporTrak series equipped with a PC interface cable connector

These devices connect to the MC-35 using a cable

with a D-sub 9-pin connector provided by the

manufacturer of the GPS device. See the MC-35

instruction manual for details. Before turning the

camera on, set the GPS device to NMEA mode

(4800 baud).

MC-35

When the camera establishes communication

with a GPS device, a

icon will be displayed in

the top control panel. The exposure meters will

not turn off while this icon is displayed. Photo

information for pictures taken while the

icon is displayed will include an

additional page ( 140) recording the current latitude, longitude, altitude,

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and compass bearing. If no data are

received from the GPS unit for two seconds, the

icon will clear from the

display and the camera will stop recording GPS information.

Compass Bearing

The compass bearing is only recorded if the GPS device

is equipped with a digital compass. Keep the GPS device

pointing in the same direction as the lens and at least

20cm (8in.) from the camera.

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)

UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock.

GPS Data

GPS data are only recorded when the icon is displayed.

Conﬁrm that the

icon is displayed in the top control

panel before shooting. A ﬂashing icon indicates that

the GPS device is searching for a signal; pictures taken

while the icon is ﬂashing will not include GPS data.

135

Two-Button Reset

Restoring Default Settings

The camera settings listed below can be restored

to default values by holding the WB and ISO but-

tons down together for more than two seconds

(these buttons are marked by a green dot). The

control panels turn off brieﬂy while settings are

reset. Custom Settings are not affected.

Option

Default

Center^*

Option

Default

Focus area

Aperture lock

Shutter-speed lock

Bracketing

Off

Exposure mode

Flexible program

Programmed auto

Off

Off^‡

Exposure

compensation

Flash sync mode

Front-curtain sync

‡Number of shots is reset to zero.

Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV

(exposure/ﬂash bracketing) or 1 (white

balance bracketing).

AE hold

Off^†

*If AF-area mode is set to group dynamic-

AF, center group will be selected.

†Custom Setting c2 (AE-L/AF-L) is unaf-

fected.

The following shooting-menu options will also be reset. Only settings in the

bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset

(

169). Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected.

Option

Default

JPEG Normal

Large

Option

Default

Auto^*

100

Image quality

Image size

White bal.

ISO sensitivity

*Fine tuning reset to 0.

Reset Shooting Menu ( 171)

Other shooting menu options for the current shooting menu bank can be reset by

selecting Yes for the Reset shooting menu option in the shooting menu.

R—Menu Reset ( 183)

Custom Settings for the current custom settings bank can be restored to default values

by selecting Yes for Custom Setting R (Menu Reset).

136

More About

Playback

Playback Options

This section details the operations that can be

performed during playback, including thumbnail

playback, playback zoom, and photo information

display.

137

Single-Image Playback

To play photographs back, press the button. The most recent photograph

will be displayed in the monitor.

To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the

button or press

the shutter-release button halfway. To view camera menus ( 39), press the

button.

Using the Multi Selector

The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector

lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.

Image Review ( 166)

When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu, photographs are auto-

matically displayed in the monitor as they are being recorded to the memory card. In

single-frame, self-timer, and mirror-up modes, photographs are displayed one at a time

as they are taken. In continuous shooting mode, display begins when shooting ends,

with the ﬁrst photograph in the current series displayed. Playback will be interrupted

when the shutter-release button is pressed, and resume when the button is released

after shooting.

Rotate Tall ( 167)

This playback menu option controls whether portrait-orientation photographs taken

with On selected for the Auto image rotation option in the setup menu are auto-

matically rotated during playback.

c5—Monitor Off ( 196)

The monitor will turn off automatically to save power if no operations are performed

for the time speciﬁed in Custom Setting c5 (Monitor off). Press the

button again

to return to playback mode.

138

Photo Information

Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in single-image

playback. There are up to eight pages of information for each photo. Press

the multi-selector left or right to cycle through photo information as follows:

(Page 5)↔ (Page 4)↔ (Page 3)↔ Page 2↔ Page 1 ↔ (Page 6) ↔ (Page 7)

↔ (Page 8) ↔ (Page 5).

Page 1

1 Voice memo icon...149

2 Protect status.........145

3 Folder number/frame

number^*................158

*Displayed in yellow if photo was taken with high-speed crop on.

100-1

Page 2

1/6

1 Voice memo icon...149

8 Image quality...........45

9 Date of recording.....18

2 Protect status.........145

3 Focus brackets^*........76 10 Time of recording ....18

4 Frame number/total

number of frames..158

11 Image authentication

.............................231

100ND2XS DSC_0001.JPG

NORMAL

3216x2136

2006

01 10 45 36

5 File name...............173 12 High-speed crop ......41

6 Folder name ..........158 13 Image size ...............48

7 Image size ...............48

11 12

*If Focus area is selected for Display mode ( 166), active focus

area is highlighted in red (in photos taken using single-servo AF with

dynamic-area AF, group dynamic-AF, or closest-subject priority, area where

focus ﬁrst locked is highlighted).

Page 3 (Shooting Data 1)^*

1 Voice memo icon...149

2 Protect status.........145

3 Camera name

4 Metering method ....86 10 Focus mode/vibration

5 Shutter speed ..........87

8 Exposure

compensation..........99

9 Focal length...........246

CAMERA

NIKON D2Xs

RIX

METERING

SHUTTER

APERTURE

1/250

F5.6

EXPOSURE MODE PROGRAM

EXP.+/

FOCAL LENGTH 56mm

AF VR :S VR-On

0.0

reduction (VR)^†...74, 244

100-1

6 Aperture..................87 11 High-speed crop ......41

7 Exposure mode........87 12 Folder number/frame

number^‡................158

11 12

*Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode ( 166).

†Displayed only if photo was taken with VR lens ( 244).

‡Displayed in yellow if photo was taken with high-speed crop on.

139

Page 4 (Shooting Data 2)^*

1 Voice memo icon...149

2 Protect status.........145

3 ISO sensitivity^†.........52

7 Sharpening..............68

8 Color mode .............72

9 Image comment ....217

ISO

100

WHITE BAL.

TONE

AUTO

SHARPNESS

COLOR MODE

COMMENT

AUTO

MODE1

4 White balance .........55 10 High-speed crop ......41

5 White balance

adjustment ..............57

11 Folder number/frame

100-1

number^‡................158

10 11

6 Tone compensation..69

*Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode ( 166).

†Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO on.

‡Displayed in yellow if photo was taken with high-speed crop on.

Page 5 (GPS Data)^*

1 Voice memo icon...149

2 Protect status.........145

3 Latitude

4 Longitude

5 Altitude

6 Coordinated Universal

Time (UTC)

LATITUDE

36.

LONGITUDE

139 44. 224

11m

7 Compass bearing^†

8 High-speed crop ......41

9 Folder number/frame

number^‡................158

ALTITUDE

TIME(UTC)

2006 01 01

10 45 36

:135.78

HEADING

100-1

*Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken ( 135).

†Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with digital compass.

‡Displayed in yellow if photo was taken with high-speed crop on.

Page 6 (Histogram)^*

100-1

1 Voice memo icon................................................149

2 Protect status......................................................145

3 Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the

image. Horizontal axis corresponds to pixel bright-

ness, vertical axis shows number of pixels of each

brightness in image.

4 Folder number/frame number^†............................158

*Displayed only if Histogram is selected for Display mode ( 166).

†Displayed in yellow if photo was taken with high-speed crop on.

140

Page 7 (Highlights)^*

1 Voice memo icon................................................149

2 Protect status......................................................145

3 Image highlights (areas of image that may be over-

exposed) are marked by a ﬂashing border^†

4 Current channel

Highlight 100-1

RGB RGB

＋

5 Folder number/frame number^‡............................158

*Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode ( 166).

†Highlights can be displayed separately for each

color channel. Press multi selector left or right while

pressing button to cycle through channels as fol-

lows: RGB (all channels)↔ R (red)↔ G (green)↔

B (blue)↔ RGB.

‡Displayed in yellow if photo was taken with high-speed crop on.

Page 8 (RGB Histogram)^*

1 Voice memo icon...149

2 Protect status.........145

3 Image highlights (areas

of image that may be

6 Histogram (RGB chan-

nel). In all histograms,

horizontal axis gives

pixel brightness, vertical

axis number of pixels.

7 Histogram (red channel)

8 Histogram (green chan-

nel)

Highlight

100-1

RGB RGB

＋

overexposed) are marked

by a ﬂashing border^†

4 Folder number/frame

number^‡................158

5 Current channel

9 Histogram (blue channel)

*Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode (

166).

†Highlights can be displayed separately for each

color channel. Press multi selector left or right while

pressing button to cycle through channels as fol-

lows: RGB (all channels)↔ R (red)↔ G (green)↔

B (blue)↔ highlight display off↔ RGB.

‡Displayed in yellow if photo was taken with high-speed crop on.

Histograms

Camera histograms are for use only as a guide and may differ from those displayed in

imaging applications.

f3—Photo Info/Playback ( 207)

The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed, so that the left and right but-

tons display other images and the up and down buttons control photo information.

141

Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback

To display images in “contact sheets” of four or

nine images, press the

button and rotate the

main command dial. The following operations

can be performed while thumbnails are dis-

played:

TToo

Press and/or rotate

Description

Change

number

of images

displayed

Press

button and rotate main command dial

to change the number of images displayed as

follows: single image↔four thumbnails↔nine

thumbnails↔single image.

Toggle

full frame

playback

Press center of multi selector to switch back

and forth between full frame and thumbnail

playback.

Highlight

images

Press multi selector up, right, left, or down to

highlight thumbnails.

Page

through

images

Press button and rotate sub-command dial to

scroll through images a page at a time.

Conﬁrmation dialog will

be displayed. Press

again to delete photo. To

exit without deleting pho-

to, press multi selector left

or right.

Delete

images

Zoom in on

highlighted

photo

Press

for enlarged view of highlighted photo

( )

(

144).

f1—Center Button>Playback Mode ( 205)

Instead of toggling between full-frame and thumbnail playback, the center of the

multi selector can be used to toggle playback zoom or display a histogram.

142

Press and/or rotate

Description

If voice memo has not been recorded for high-

lighted photo, voice memo will be recorded

Record/

play voice

memo

while

button is pressed (

148). If voice

memo has been recorded for highlighted image,

pressing button will start playback. Press again

to pause playback ( 152).

Images marked by

using button or Delete option in playback

menu (note that protected images will be delet-

ed when memory card is formatted). To protect

image, or to remove protection from protected

icon can not be deleted

Change

protect

status of

highlighted

photo

image, press

button ( 145).

Display

menus

Press

39).

button to display camera menus (

Return to

shooting

mode

To end playback and return to shooting mode,

press

button or press shutter-release button

Shutter-release/

halfway.

Using the Multi Selector

The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector

lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.

Image Review ( 166)

When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu, photographs are auto-

matically displayed in the monitor as they are being recorded to the memory card. In

single-frame and self-timer modes, photographs are displayed one at a time as they are

taken. In continuous shooting mode, display begins when shooting ends. Thumbnail

playback is only available in continuous shooting mode.

c5—Monitor Off ( 196)

The monitor will turn off automatically to save power if no operations are performed

for the time speciﬁed in Custom Setting c5 (Monitor off). Press the

button again

to return to playback mode.

143

Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom

Press the

button to zoom in on the image displayed in single-image play-

back or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback. The fol-

lowing operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:

ToTo

Use

( )

Description

Cancel/

resume zoom

Press

to cancel zoom and return to single-image or

thumbnail playback. Press again to zoom image in.

Press button to display frame

showing area currently zoomed in.

While button is pressed, multi

selector can be used to move frame

and main command dial can be used

to control size of frame—rotate

dial counterclockwise to zoom out,

Select area

displayed

clockwise to zoom in to maximum of approximately 27×

(large images), 20× (medium images), or 13× (small im-

ages). Release

monitor.

button to magnify selected area to ﬁll

View other

images

Rotate main command dial to view same area of other im-

ages at current zoom ratio.

Use multi selector to view area not

visible in monitor. Hold multi se-

lector down to scroll rapidly to other

areas of frame.

View other

areas of im-

age

144

Protecting Photographs from Deletion

In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the

button can be used to

protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected ﬁles can not be

deleted using the button or the Delete option in the playback menu, and

have DOS “read-only” status when viewed on a Windows computer. Note

that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.

To protect a photograph:

Display the image in full-frame playback or highlight it in the thumbnail

list.

Press the

button. The photograph will be marked with a

icon.

To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted, display

the photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the

button.

Voice Memos

Changes to the protect status of images also apply to any voice memos that may

have been recorded with the images. Voice memo overwrite status can not be set

separately.

Removing Protection from All Images

To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in

the Playback folder menu, press the

and

buttons together for about two

seconds.

145

Deleting Individual Photographs

To delete a photograph displayed in single-image or zoom playback, or the

photograph highlighted in thumbnail playback, press the

deleted, photographs can not be recovered.

button. Once

Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list.

Press the button. A conﬁrmation dialog will be displayed.

To delete the photograph, press the

button again. To exit without

deleting the photograph, press the multi selector left or right.

Voice Memos

If a voice memo has been recorded with the selected

image, the conﬁrmation dialog shown at right will be

displayed when the

button is pressed.

• Image/Sound: Select this option and press the

button to delete both photo and voice memo.

• Sound only: Select this option and press the

but-

ton to delete only the voice memo.

To exit without deleting either voice memo or photo, press multi selector left or right.

Protected and Hidden Images

Images marked with a

icon are protected and can not be deleted. Hidden images

are not displayed in single-image or thumbnail playback and can not be selected for

deletion.

Delete ( 156)

To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu.

After Delete ( 167)

The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or

the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted.

146

Voice Memos

Recording and Playback

The D2Xs is equipped with a built-in microphone,

allowing voice memos to be added to photo-

graphs. Voice memos can be played back over

the camera’s built-in speaker.

147

Recording Voice Memos

Voice memos up to sixty seconds long can be added to photographs using

the built-in microphone. In shooting mode, a voice memo can be added

to the most recent photograph. In playback mode, voice memos can be

added to photographs displayed in single-image playback or selected in the

thumbnail list.

Ready the camera for recording.

Shooting Mode

At default settings, voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode.

To enable automatic or manual voice memo recording, select the appro-

priate option for Voice memo in the camera setup menu ( 213). Voice

memos can only be added to the last photograph taken.

Playback Mode

Display the photograph to which the memo is to be added (single-image

playback) or highlight the photograph in the thumbnail list (thumbnail

playback). Only one voice memo can be recorded per image; additional

voice memos can not be recorded for images already marked with a

icon.

Press and hold the button. A voice memo

will be recorded while the button is held down

(note that no voice memo will be recorded if

the button is not held down for at least one

second).

Automatic Recording (Shooting Mode)

If On (auto and manual) is selected for Voice memo, a voice memo

will be recorded for the last photograph taken when the shutter-release

button is released after shooting. Recording will end when the button

is pressed or after the speciﬁed recording time has ended.

Dust Off Ref Photos

Voice memos can not be recorded for Image Dust Off reference data ( 221).

148

Interrupting Recording

Recording will end automatically if:

• The

button is pressed to display the menus

button is pressed

• The shutter-release button is pressed halfway

• The camera is turned off

During interval timer photography, recording will end automatically about two seconds

before the next photograph is taken.

During Recording

During recording, the

icons in the rear

Rear control panel Viewﬁnder

Monitor

control panel and viewﬁnder sidebar will

blink. A countdown timer in the rear con-

trol panel shows the length of the voice

memo that can be recorded (in seconds).

In playback mode, a icon is displayed in

the monitor during recording.

After Recording

If a voice memo has been recorded for

the most recent photograph, a icon will

be displayed in the rear control panel and

viewﬁnder sidebar.

Rear control panel Viewﬁnder

Monitor

If a voice memo exists for the photograph

currently selected in playback mode, a

icon will be displayed in the monitor.

Voice Memo File Names

Voice memos are stored as WAV ﬁles with names of the form “xxxxnnnn.WAV,” where

“xxxxnnnn“ is a ﬁle name copied from the image with which the voice memo is associ-

ated. For example, the voice memo for the image “DSC_0002.JPG” would have the

ﬁle name “DSC_0002.WAV.” Voice memo ﬁle names can be viewed on a computer.

149

Voice Memo Recording Options

Three setup menu options control voice memo recording: Voice memo,

Voice memo overwrite, and Voice memo button.

Voice Memo

To choose a voice memo option for shooting

mode, highlight Voice memo in the setup menu

(

213) and press the multi selector to the right.

The following options are available:

Option

Description

Off

(default)

Voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode.

Selecting this option displays menu shown at

right; select maximum recording time from 5,

10, 20, 30, 45, or 60s. Unless On is selected

for Image review in playback menu, recording

will begin when shutter-release button is released

after shooting. Recording ends when button

is pressed or after speciﬁed recording time has

ended.

(auto and

manual)

Manual Memo can be recorded for most recent photograph by pressing and

only holding button ( 148).

Voice Memo

The option selected for Voice memo is indicated by an icon in the rear control panel.

On (auto and manual)

Manual only

150

Voice Memo Overwrite

This option controls whether the voice memo for

the most recent photograph can be overwritten

in shooting mode. Highlight Voice memo over-

write in the setup menu ( 213) and press the

multi selector to the right. The following options

are available:

Option

Description

Voice memo can not be recorded in shooting mode if one already exists for

most recent image.

Disable

(default)

Voice memo can be recorded in shooting mode even if one already exists

for most recent image. Existing memo will be deleted and replaced by new

memo. Voice memos can not be overwritten in playback mode.

Enable

Voice Memo Button

This option controls manual recording. Highlight

Voice memo button in the setup menu ( 213)

and press the multi selector to the right. The fol-

lowing options are available:

ToOption

Press and hold Voice memo is recorded while button is held down. Recording

(default) will end automatically after 60s.

Press to start/ Recording begins when button is pressed and ends when but-

stop ton is pressed again. Recording will end automatically after 60s.

Description

151

Playing Voice Memos

Voice memos can be played back over the cam-

era’s built-in speaker when the associated image

is viewed in single-frame playback or highlighted

in the thumbnail list. The presence of a voice

memo is indicated by an icon.

TToo

Press

Description

Start/end

playback

Press to start playback. Playback will end when button is

pressed again or entire memo has been played back.

Conﬁrmation dialog will be displayed.

Press multi selector up or down to high-

light option, press

• Image/Sound: Delete both photo and

voice memo.

• Sound only: Delete voice memo only.

To exit without deleting image or voice memo, press multi

selector left or right.

to select.

Delete

voice

memo

Interrupting Playback

Playback will end automatically if:

• The

button is pressed to display the menus

• The monitor is turned off by pressing the button or by pressing the shutter-release

button halfway

• The camera is turned off

• Another image is displayed (single-image playback) or another thumbnail is high-

lighted (thumbnail playback)

152

Voice Memo Playback Options

The Audio output option in the setup menu

controls whether voice memos are played back

over the camera’s built-in speaker or by a device

to which the camera is connected via the EG-D2

audio/video cable. When sound is played back

over the built-in speaker, the Audio output op-

tion also controls playback volume.

Highlight Audio output in the setup menu ( 213) and press the multi

selector to the right. The following options are available:

OToption

Description

Voice memos are played back over built-in

speaker. Selecting this option displays menu

shown at right. Press multi selector up or down

to change volume. Beep will sound when op-

tion is selected. Press multi selector to right to

make selection and return to setup menu.

Via speaker

(default)

Via VIDEO

OUT

Audio signal output to A/V-OUT terminal.

Video memos are not played back.

for which voice memo exists is viewed in monitor.

icon is displayed when photo

Off

153

154

Menu Guide

Index to Menu Options

Changes to a variety of camera settings are made

with the help of menus that appear in the camera

monitor. This chapter covers:

The Playback Menu

The playback menu contains options for manag-

ing the images stored on memory cards, and for

playing pictures back in automated slide shows.

The Shooting Menu

The shooting menu contains advanced shoot-

ing options, such as image sharpening and tone

compensation.

Custom Settings

The CSM (Custom Settings) menu controls ﬁne

details of camera operation.

The Setup Menu

This menu is used for basic camera setup op-

erations, including formatting memory cards and

setting the time and date.

155

The Playback Menu

Managing Images

The playback menu contains the following options:

Option

Delete

156–157

158

Playback folder

Slide show

Hide image

Print set

159–160

161–162

163

Display mode

Image review

After delete

Rotate tall

166

167

The playback menu is only displayed if there is a memory card in the camera.

Delete

To display the delete menu, highlight Delete and

press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option,

then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Selected Delete selected photographs.

All Delete all photographs.

Description

High-Capacity Memory Cards

If the memory card contains a large number of ﬁles or folders and the number of pic-

tures to be deleted is very large, deletion can sometimes take more than half an hour.

Protected and Hidden Images

Images marked with a

icon are protected and can not be deleted. Hidden images

(

161) are not displayed in the thumbnail list and can not be selected for deletion.

Using the Multi Selector

The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector

lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.

156

Deleting Selected Photographs: Selected

Choosing Selected displays the photographs in the folder or folders selected

in the Playback folder menu ( 158) as small thumbnail images.

Highlight image. (To view highlight-

ed image full screen, press . Press

again to return to thumbnail list.)

Select highlighted image. Selected

image marked by icon.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures. To deselect picture,

highlight and press center of multi selector. To exit without deleting

pictures, press

button.

Conﬁrmation dialog displayed. Press

multi selector up or down to highlight

option, press

to select.

• Yes: delete selected pictures and any

associated voice memos

• No: exit without deleting images

Deleting All Photographs: All

Choosing All displays the conﬁrmation dialog

shown at right. Press the multi selector up or

down to highlight an option, then press the

button to make a selection.

• Yes: delete all images in the folder or folders

selected in the Playback folder menu ( 158),

together with any associated voice memos. Pic-

tures that are protected or hidden will not be

deleted.

• No: exit without deleting images.

157

Playback Folder

To display the playback folder menu, highlight

Playback folder in the playback menu ( 156)

and press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option,

then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

ND2XS Images in all folders created by the D2Xs will be visible during playback.

Images in all folders created by cameras that conform to the Design Rule

for Camera File System (DCF)—all Nikon digital cameras and most other

makes of digital camera—will be visible during playback.

All

Current Only images in the current folder will be visible during playback.

Selecting a Folder for Storage

The Active folder option in the shooting menu is used to create new folders and to

select the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored ( 172).

“Current”

If multiple folders are created using the Active folder>New option in the shooting

menu ( 172), only photographs in the folder selected in the Active folder menu will

be played back when Current is selected for Playback folder. To view photographs

in other folders, select ND2XS or All.

158

Slide Show

To play images back one after the other in an

automated “slide show,” highlight Slide show in

the playback menu ( 156) and press the multi

selector to the right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Start

Start slide show.

Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.

Audio playback Display menu of voice memo playback options.

Starting the Slide Show: Start

To start the slide show, highlight Start and press the multi selector to the

right. All photographs in the folder or folders selected in the Playback

folder menu ( 158) will be played back in the order recorded, with a pause

between each image. Hidden photographs ( 161) will not be played back.

The following operations can be performed during a slide show:

To To

Press

Description

Go forward or

back one frame

Press multi selector up to return to previous frame, down

to skip to next frame.

View photo

info

Press multi selector left or right to change photo info

displayed during slide show.

Pause

Press

to pause slide show ( 160).

Exit to playback

Press

to end slide show and display playback menu.

to end slide show and return to playback with

Exit to playback

mode

current image displayed in monitor.

Press shutter-release button halfway to end slide show,

turn monitor off, and return to shooting mode (voice

memo playback will not be interrupted).

Exit to shooting Shutter

mode release

159

The dialog shown at right is displayed when the

show ends or when the button is pressed to

pause playback. Press the multi selector up or

down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

• Restart: Resume slide show.

• Frame interval: Change the length of time each picture is displayed.

• Audio playback: Display a menu of voice memo playback options.

To exit the slide show and return to the playback menu, press the multi se-

lector to the left or press the

button.

Changing the Display Interval: Frame Interval

To change the time each image is displayed, high-

light Frame interval in the Slide show or pause

menu and press the multi selector right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight the appro-

priate option and then press the multi selector to

the right to return to the previous menu.

Voice Memo Playback Options: Audio Playback

Selecting Audio playback in the Slide show or

pause menu displays the menu shown at right.

Press the multi selector up or down to highlight

an option, then press to the right to make a selec-

tion.

Option

Description

Off Voice memos are not played back during slide shows.

Voice memos are played back during slide shows.

Menu shown at right will be displayed; press multi

selector up or down to highlight option, press to

right select.

•

Frame interval: Playback ends when next frame is

displayed, even if entire memo has not been played.

• Length of voice memo: Next frame is not displayed until entire memo

has been played, even if frame interval is shorter than voice memo.

160

Hide Image

The Hide image option is used to hide or reveal selected photographs. Hid-

den images are visible only in the Hide image menu, and can only be deleted

by formatting the memory card.

Highlight Hide image in the playback menu (

156) and press the multi selector to the right.

Press the multi selector up or down to highlight

an option, then press right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Select/set Hide or reveal selected photographs.

Deselect all? Reveal all photographs.

Hiding Selected Photographs: Select/Set

Choosing Select/set displays the photographs in the folder or folders se-

lected in the Playback folder menu ( 158) as small thumbnail images.

Highlight image. (To view highlight-

ed image full screen, press . Press

again to return to thumbnail list.)

Select highlighted image. Selected

image marked by

icon.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select

additional pictures. To deselect

picture, highlight and press

center of multi selector. To exit

without changing hidden status

of pictures, press

button.

Complete operation and return to

playback menu.

161

Revealing All Photographs: Deselect All

Choosing Deselect all? displays the conﬁrmation

dialog shown at right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press the

button to make a selection.

• Yes: reveal all images in the folder or folders

selected in the Playback folder menu ( 158).

The monitor will brieﬂy show the message

“Hide image done,” and then the playback

menu will be displayed.

• No: exit to the playback menu without changing the hidden status of im-

ages.

File Attributes for Hidden Images

Hidden images have “hidden” and “read-only” status when viewed on a Windows

computer. In the case of “NEF+JPEG” images, this marking applies to both the NEF

(RAW) and JPEG image.

Protected and Hidden Images

Removing protection from an image that is both hidden and protected will simultane-

ously reveal the image.

162

Print Set

Print set is used to create a digital “print order” that lists the photographs

to be printed, the number of copies, and the information to be included on

each print. This information is stored on the memory card in Digital Print

Order Format (DPOF). The card can then be removed from the camera and

used to print the selected images printed on any DPOF-compatible device.

Highlight Print set in the playback menu ( 156)

and press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option,

then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Select/set Select photographs for printing.

Deselect all? Remove all images from print order.

Print Set

Print set will not be available if there is not enough space on the memory card to

record the print order. Delete unwanted pictures and try again.

NEF Images

Images created at image quality settings of NEF (Raw) ( 45) can not be selected for

printing using this option.

Taking Pictures for Direct Printing

When taking images to be printed without modiﬁcation, set the Color space option

in the shooting menu to sRGB ( 70).

DPOF/PictBridge

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows pictures to

be printed from print orders stored on the memory card. Before printing, check that

the printer or print service supports DPOF. Pictures selected using Print set can also be

printed on PictBridge printers via direct USB connection ( 238). When a PictBridge

printer is connected to the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable, a menu will be

displayed in the camera monitor; select Print (DPOF) to print the current print order.

Note that the date and shooting information will not be printed.

163

Modifying the Print Order: Select/Set

Choosing Select/set displays the photographs in the folder or folders se-

lected in the Playback folder menu ( 158) as small thumbnail images.

Highlight image. (To view highlighted

image full screen, press . Press again

to return to thumbnail list.)

Press button and press multi selector

up or down to specify number of prints

(up to 99), or press center of multi se-

lector to select image and set number

of prints to 1. Selected images are

marked by

icon.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures. To deselect picture,

highlight and press center of multi selector. To exit without changing

print order, press

button.

Complete print order and display menu of print options. Press multi selector

up or down to highlight option.

• To print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order, highlight

Data imprint and press multi selector to right. ✔ will appear next to item.

• To print date of recording on all pictures in print order, highlight Imprint

date and press multi selector to right. ✔ will appear next to item.

• To deselect checked item, highlight and press multi selector to right.

To complete print order and return to playback menu, highlight Done and

press multi selector to right. To exit without altering print order, press

button.

164

Removing All Images from the Print Order: Deselect All

Choosing Deselect all? displays the conﬁrmation

dialog shown at right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press the

button to make a selection.

• Yes: remove all images from the print order.

The monitor will brieﬂy show the message

“Print set done,” and then the playback menu

will be displayed.

• No: exit to the playback menu without changing the print order.

After Creating a Print Order

After creating a print order, do not change the hidden status of images in the print

order or use a computer or other device to delete images. Either action could cause

problems during printing.

Exif version 2.21

The D2Xs supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras) ver-

sion 2.21, a standard that allows information stored with photographs to be used for

optimal color reproduction when images are output on Exif-compliant printers.

165

Display Mode

To choose the information listed in the photo-

information display ( 139), highlight Display

mode in the playback menu ( 156) and press

the multi selector to the right. Press the multi se-

lector up or down to highlight options, then press

to the right to make a selection. A ✔ appears

next to selected items; to deselect, highlight and press the multi selector to

the right. To return to the playback menu, highlight Done and press the

multi selector to the right.

Option

Data^*

Description

Shooting data appears in photo information display.

Histogram appears in photo information display.

Highlight page appears in photo information display.

Histogram

Highlights^*

RGB histogram^*Histogram appears in photo information display.

Active focus area (if single-servo AF is used with dynamic-area AF,

group dynamic-AF, or closest-subject priority, area where focus

ﬁrst locked) is shown in red in photo information display.

Focus area

*Default selection.

Image Review

Image review controls whether or not photo-

graphs are displayed in the monitor immediately

after shooting. Highlight Image review in the

playback menu ( 156) and press the multi se-

lector to the right. Press the multi selector up or

down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Option

Off

Description

Photographs are not automatically displayed after shooting.

Photographs are automatically displayed after shooting.

166

After Delete

To choose whether the following or previous pic-

ture is displayed after an image is deleted, high-

light After delete in the playback menu ( 156)

and press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option,

then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Show After image is deleted, following image is displayed or highlighted in

next thumbnail list. If deleted image was last frame in memory, previous

Description

(default) frame will be displayed or highlighted.

After image is deleted, previous image is displayed or highlighted in

thumbnail list. If deleted image was ﬁrst frame in memory, following

frame will be displayed or highlighted.

Show

If user was scrolling through images in order recorded before deletion,

following image will be displayed or highlighted (if deleted image was

last frame in memory, previous frame will be displayed or highlighted).

If user was scrolling through images in reverse order, previous image will

be displayed or highlighted (if deleted image was ﬁrst frame in memory,

following frame will be displayed or highlighted).

Continue

as before

Rotate Tall

To choose whether photographs taken in “tall”

(portrait) orientation are automatically rotated for

display in the monitor, highlight Rotate tall in

the playback menu ( 156) and press the multi

selector to the right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Off

(default)

“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are not displayed in tall orientation.

“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos taken with On selected for Auto image

rotation ( 218) are displayed in tall orientation during playback (tall ori-

entation images are displayed at ²/3 size of other images to ﬁt monitor).

167

The Shooting Menu

Shooting Options

The shooting menu contains three pages of options:

Option

Shooting menu bank

169–170

Reset shooting menu

Active folder

171

172

File naming

173

Image quality^*

Image size^*

45–46

48–49

41–42

Hi-speed crop

JPEG compression

RAW compression

White balance^*

Long exp. NR

55–67

175

High ISO NR

176

ISO sensitivity^*

Image sharpening

Tone compensation

Color space

52–53

Color mode

Hue adjustment

Image overlay

Multiple exposure

Trim

118–119

120–122

123–124

125–129

131–134

Intvl timer shooting

Non-CPU lens data

*Reset to defaults when a two-button reset is per-

formed ( 136).

Press the multi selector up or down to scroll between pages.

Using the Multi Selector

The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector

lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.

168

Shooting Menu Bank

All shooting menu options except interval timer and multiple exposure set-

tings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to settings in one bank have

no effect on the others. To store a particular combination of frequently-used

settings, select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings.

The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned

off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected. Different com-

binations of settings can be stored in the other banks, allowing the user to

switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropri-

ate bank from the bank menu.

The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C, and D. A

descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option.

To display the bank menu, highlight Shooting

menu bank in the shooting menu ( 168) and

press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option,

then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

A^*

(default)

Select bank A.

B^*

C^*

D^*

Select bank B.

Select bank C.

Select bank D.

Rename Rename selected bank.

*Descriptive caption will also be displayed if bank has been renamed.

ISO Sensitivity

If a bank in which ISO sensitivity has been set to a value over ISO 800 is chosen after

On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto;

191), ISO sensitivity will NOT be

adjusted automatically.

Shooting Menu Bank

The rear control panel shows the bank currently selected

in the shooting menu bank menu.

169

Renaming Shooting Menu Banks

Highlight Rename and press the multi selector to the right.

A list of shooting menu banks will be dis-

played. Highlight the desired bank and press

the multi selector to the right.

The following dialog will be displayed. Enter a name as described be-

low.

Keyboard area

Name area

Use multi selector to

Name appears here. To

highlight letters, press

move cursor, press

button and use multi

center of multi selector

to select.

selector.

To move the cursor in the name area, press the

button and use the

multi selector. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use

the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area

and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the character at the

current cursor position, press the

menu without changing the bank name, press the

button. To return to the shooting

button.

Bank names can be up to twenty characters long. Any characters after

the twentieth will be deleted.

After editing the name, press

the bank menu.

to return to

170

Reset Shooting Menu

To restore default settings for the current shooting

menu bank ( 169), highlight Reset shooting

menu in the shooting menu ( 168) and press

the multi selector to the right. Press the multi

selector up or down to highlight an option, then

press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

No Exit menu, leaving settings unchanged.

Yes Restore settings to default values.

The following settings are affected:

Option

Default

DSC

Option

Hue

Default

File naming

Image quality^*

Image size^*

JPEG Normal

Large

Multiple exposure^‡

Number of shots

Auto gain

Hi-speed crop

JPEG compression

RAW compression

White balance.^*

Long exp. NR

High ISO NR

Off

Interval timer shooting^‡

Start time

Size priority

NEF (Raw)

Auto^†

Now

Interval

00:01´:00˝

Off

No. of intervals

No. of shots

Start

On (Normal)

100

ISO sensitivity^*

Off

Image sharpening

Auto

Non-CPU lens data

Focal length

Tone

compensation

N/A

Auto

Maximum

aperture

Color space

Color mode

sRGB

‡Applies to all banks. Shooting ends

when reset is performed.

*Defaults can also be restored by perform-

ing two-button reset ( 136).

†Fine tuning reset to 0.

171

Active Folder

To select the folder in which subsequent im-

ages will be stored, highlight Active folder in

the shooting menu ( 168) and press the multi

selector to the right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Dialog shown at right will be displayed; press

multi selector up or down to choose number for

new folder. Press multi selector to right to create

new folder and return to shooting menu. Subse-

quent photographs will be stored in new folder.

New

List of existing folders will be displayed; press

multi selector up or down to highlight folder,

press to right to select and return to shooting

menu. Subsequent photographs will be stored

in selected folder.

Select

folder

Number of Folders

Additional time will be required for recording and playback if the memory card con-

tains a very large number of folders.

Automatic Folder Creation

If the current folder contains 999 ﬁles, or if sequential ﬁle numbering ( 199) is on and

the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999, the camera will automatically

create a new folder for the next picture by adding one to the current folder number. If

the memory card already contains a folder numbered 999, the shutter release will be

disabled. If sequential ﬁle numbering is on, the shutter release will also be disabled if

the current folder is numbered 999 and contains a picture numbered 9999. To con-

tinue shooting, create a folder with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder

with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images.

Creating a Folder at Startup

If the

button is pressed when the camera is turned on, a new folder will be created

by adding one to the current folder number if no empty folders already exist.

172

File Naming

Photographs are saved using ﬁle names consisting of “DSC_” or “_DSC”

followed by a four-digit ﬁle number and a three-letter extension (e.g., “DSC_

0001.JPG”). The File Naming option is used to change the “DSC” portion

of the ﬁle name.

Highlight File Naming in the shooting menu (

168) and press the multi selector to the right. The

menu shown at right will be displayed; press the

multi selector to the right to display the following

dialog.

Preﬁx area

File name preﬁx appears

here. To move cursor left

or right, press

Keyboard area

Use multi selector to high-

light letters, press center

of multi selector to select.

button

and use multi selector.

To move the cursor left or right in the preﬁx area, press the button and use

the multi selector. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use

the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and

press the center of the multi selector. To delete the character at the current

cursor position, press the button. To return to the shooting menu without

changing the ﬁle naming rule, press the

button.

After editing the ﬁle name preﬁx, press

to return to the shooting menu.

New photographs will be saved using the new ﬁle naming rule.

173

Image Quality

Eight options are available for image quality. See

“Taking Photographs: Image Quality and Size”

(

45).

Image Size

Image size can be selected from Large, Medium,

and Small. See “Taking Photographs: Image

Quality and Size” ( 48).

Hi-Speed Crop

Select On to shoot only the area in the viewﬁnder

high-speed crop, increasing the frame advance

rate to up to 8fps and allowing more images to

be stored in the memory buffer. See “Taking Pho-

tographs: High-Speed Crop” ( 41).

JPEG Compression

Choose whether to compress JPEG images to a

ﬁxed size or to vary ﬁle size for improved image

quality. See “Taking Photographs: Image Quality

and Size” ( 47).

174

RAW Compression

Choose whether to compress NEF (RAW) images cre-

ated at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG

ﬁne, NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal, NEF (RAW)+JPEG

basic, and NEF (RAW). See “Taking Photographs:

Image Quality and Size” ( 48).

White Balance

Nine options are available for white balance. See

“Taking Photographs: White Balance” ( 55).

Long Exp. NR

Photographs taken at shutter speeds of ½s or

slower can be processed to reduce “noise” in the

form of randomly-spaced, brightly-colored pixels.

Highlight Long exp. NR in the shooting menu

(

168) and press the multi selector to the right.

Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an

option, then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Off

(default)

Noise reduction off; camera functions normally.

Noise reduction on; capacity of memory buffer drops.

At shutter speeds of about ½s or slower, images are

processed to reduce noise, more than doubling pro-

cessing time. During processing,

shutter-speed/aperture displays. Next photo can be

blinks in

taken when

is no longer displayed. Note that if photographs

are played back during processing, the image displayed in the monitor may

not show the effects of noise reduction.

175

High ISO NR

Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can

be processed to reduce “noise.” Highlight High

ISO NR in the shooting menu ( 168) and press

the multi selector to the right. Press the multi

selector up or down to highlight an option, then

press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Noise reduction takes effect at ISO sensitivities of ISO 400–800 or if ISO

sensitivity is raised to 400 or higher when On is selected for Custom

Setting b1 (ISO auto), increasing processing time and reducing capac-

ity of memory buffer. Increased noise reduction is performed at ISO

sensitivities over ISO 800 or when On (high) is selected.

On (normal)

(default)

On (high)

Off

Noise reduction turns off except at ISO sensitivities over ISO 800.

ISO Sensitivity

ISO sensitivity can be increased from the default

value (100). Settings over ISO 800 are only avail-

able when Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) is off.

See “Taking Photographs: ISO Sensitivity” (

52).

Image Sharpening

Seven options are available for image sharpening.

See “Taking Photographs: Image Adjustment” (

68).

Tone Compensation

Five options are available for controlling image

contrast. See “Taking Photographs: Image Ad-

justment” ( 69).

176

Color Space

Choose from sRGB and Adobe RGB color spaces.

See “Taking Photographs: Image Adjustment” (

70).

Color Mode

Choose from four color modes, including black-

and-white. See “Taking Photographs: Image

Adjustment” ( 72).

Hue Adjustment

Hue can be set to values between approximately

–9° and +9° in seven increments of roughly 3°.

See “Taking Photographs: Image Adjustment”

(

73).

Image Overlay

Create a new image by superimposing two exist-

ing RAW photographs. The RAW photographs

must have been created using the D2Xs and be

on the same memory card. See “Taking Photo-

graphs: Overlay/Multiple Exposure” ( 118).

Multiple Exposure

Create a single photograph from two to ten expo-

sures. See “Taking Photographs: Overlay/Multiple

Exposure” ( 120).

177

Trim

Create a cropped copy of an existing photograph.

See “Taking Photographs: Trimming Photo-

graphs” ( 123).

Interval Timer Shooting

Take photographs automatically at pre-selected

intervals. See “Taking Photographs: Interval Timer

Photography” ( 125).

Non-CPU Lens Data

Specifying the focal length and maximum aper-

ture allows such features as color matrix metering,

aperture value display, and balanced ﬁll ﬂash to be

used with non-CPU lenses. See “Taking Photo-

graphs: Non-CPU Lenses” ( 131).

178

Custom Settings

Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

Custom settings are used to ﬁne-tune a variety of camera settings to suit the

user’s preferences, creating combinations of settings that differ from the fac-

tory defaults in effect at the time your camera was purchased. In addition to

Custom Settings C (Bank select) and R (Menu reset), settings in the CSM

(Custom Settings) menu are divided into the following six groups:

Group

a Autofocus

Custom Settings

a1–a8

b Metering/exposure

c Timers/AE&AF lock

d Shooting/display

e Bracketing/ﬂash

f Controls

b1–b7

c1–c5

d1–d6

e1–e8

f1–f8

Press the multi selector up or down to highlight

the desired group and then press the multi se-

lector to the right. The full list of Custom Settings

a1–f8 will be displayed, starting with the settings

in the selected group. To select a setting in a dif-

ferent group, press the multi selector up or down

scroll until the desired setting is displayed, or press the multi selector to the

left to return the top menu and select a different group. Custom Setting a1

(AF-C mode priority) and f8 (No CF card?) are linked: pressing the multi se-

lector up when Custom Setting a1 is highlighted displays Custom Setting f8,

while pressing the multi selector down while Custom Setting f8 is highlighted

displays Custom Setting a1.

Using the Multi Selector

The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector

lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.

179

The following Custom Settings are available:

Options

Bank select

Custom setting bank

Reset CSM menu

182

Menu reset

183–184

Autofocus

a1 AF-C mode priority

a2 AF-S mode priority

a3 Group dynamic AF

a4 Lock-on

AF-C priority selection

AF-S priority selection

185

Pattern selection in Group Dynamic AF

Focus Tracking with Lock-On

AF activation

186–187

188

a5 AF activation

a6 Focus area Illum

a7 Focus area

188

Focus area Illumination

Focus area select

189

190

a8 Vertical AF-ON

Metering/exposure

b1 ISO auto

Vertical AF-ON button function

190

ISO auto control

191–192

192

b2 ISO step value

b3 EV step

ISO sensitivity step value

EV steps for exposure control

EV steps for exposure compensation

Easy exposure compensation

Center weight area

192

b4 Exposure comp. EV

b5 Exposure comp.

b6 Center weight

b7 Fine tune exposure

Timers/AE&AF lock

c1 AE lock

193

194

Fine tune optimal exposure

194

AE lock buttons

195

196

c2 AE-L/AF-L

Assignment of AE-L/AF-L button

Auto meter-off delay

Self-timer delay

c3 Auto meter-off

c4 Self-timer

c5 Monitor off

Monitor off delay

180

Options

Shooting/display

d1 Shooting speed

d2 Maximum shots

d3 Exp. delay mode

d4 File No. Seq.

CL-Mode shooting speed

Max No. of shots taken in continuous shooting

Exposure delay mode

197

198

File number sequence

199

d5 Cntrl panel/ﬁnder

d6 Illumination

Control panel/viewﬁnder display

LCD Illumination

199–200

200

Bracketing/ﬂash

e1 Flash sync speed

e2 Flash shutter speed

e3 AA ﬂash mode

e4 Modeling ﬂash

e5 Auto BKT set

Flash sync speed setting

Slowest speed when using ﬂash

AA ﬂash mode

201

202

203

204

205

Preview button activates modeling ﬂash

Auto bracketing set

e6 Manual mode bkting Auto bracketing in M exposure mode

e7 Auto BKT order

e8 Auto BKT selection

Controls

Auto bracketing order

Auto Bracketing Selection method

f1 Center button

f2 Multi selector

Multi selector center button

205–206

207

When multi selector is pressed:

f3 Photo info/playback Role of multi selector in full-frame playback

207

f4 FUNC. button

FUNC. button press

208

f5 FUNC. + command

f6 Command dials

f7 Buttons and dials

f8 No CF card?

FUNC. button + command dials

Customize command dials

Setting method for buttons and dials

Disable shutter if no CF card

209

210–211

212

181

Custom Setting C: Custom Setting Bank

Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to settings in

one bank have no effect on the others. To store a particular combination of

frequently-used settings, select one of the four banks and set the camera to

these settings. The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the

camera is turned off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.

Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks, allowing

the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the

appropriate bank from the bank menu.

The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C, and D. A

descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described in

“The Shooting Menu: Shooting Menu Bank” ( 169).

To display the bank menu, highlight Bank select

in the top level of the CSM menu ( 179) and

press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option,

then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

A^*

(default)

Select bank A.

B^*

C^*

D^*

Select bank B.

Select bank C.

Select bank D.

Rename Rename selected bank.

*Descriptive caption will also be displayed if bank has been renamed.

ISO Sensitivity

If a bank in which On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto;

after ISO sensitivity has been set to a value over ISO 800, ISO sensitivity will NOT be

adjusted automatically.

191) is chosen

182

Custom Setting R: Reset CSM Menu

To restore default settings for the current Custom

Settings bank ( 182), highlight Menu reset in

the top level of the CSM menu ( 179) and press

the multi selector to the right. Press the multi

selector up or down to highlight an option, then

press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

No Exit menu, leaving settings unchanged.

Yes Restore settings to default values.

Two-Button Reset

Custom Settings are not reset when a two-button reset is performed ( 136).

Custom Settings Bank

If settings in the current bank have been modiﬁed from

default values, the rear control panel display will show

CUSTOM and the letter of the bank. An asterisk will be

displayed next to the altered settings in the second level

of the Custom Settings menu.

183

Default settings are listed below.

Option

Default

fps rate

Focus

Option

Default

Off

a1 AF-C mode priority

a2 AF-S mode priority

d3 Exp. delay mode

d4 File No. Seq.

Off

d5 Cntrl panel/ﬁnder

Pattern 1/

Center area

a3 Group dynamic AF

Rear control panel

ISO sensitivity

Frame count

Viewﬁnder display

a4 Lock-on

Normal

d6 Illumination

Lamp on switch

1/250 s

a5 AF activation

Shutter/AF-ON

e1 Flash sync speed

e2 Flash shutter speed

e3 AA ﬂash mode

e4 Modeling ﬂash

e5 Auto BKT set

a6 Focus area illum

Manual focus mode

Continuous mode

When selected

0.2s

1/60 s

a7 Focus area

No wrap

AE & ﬂash

Flash/speed

MTR>under>over

a8 Vertical AF-ON

b1 ISO auto

AF-ON+focus area

e6 Manual mode bkting

e7 Auto BKT order

Off

1/3 step

Off

b2 ISO step value

b3 EV step

e8 Auto BKT selection Manual value select

f1 Center button

b4 Exposure comp. EV

b5 Exposure comp.

b6 Center weight

b7 Fine tune exposure

c1 AE lock

Shooting mode

Playback mode

Center AF area

Thumbnail on/off

φ 8mm

0^*

f2 Multi selector

Do nothing

f3 Photo info/playback

f4 FUNC. button

Info

/PB▲▼

None

AE-L/AF-L button

AE/AF lock

c2 AE-L/AF-L

f5 FUNC. + command

None

c3 Auto meter-off

c4 Self-timer

f6 Command dials

Rotate direction

Change main/sub

Aperture setting

Normal

Off

Sub-command dial

Off

10s

c5 Monitor off

d1 Shooting speed

d2 Maximum shots

20s

3fps

Menus and playback

f7 Buttons and dials

f8 No CF card?

Default

*Applies to all metering methods.

184

Custom Setting a1: AF-C Priority Selection

This option controls whether photographs can

be taken whenever the shutter-release button is

pressed (release priority) or only when the camera

is in focus (focus priority) in continuous-servo AF.

Highlight a1 AF-C mode priority in the second

level of the CSM menu ( 180) and press the

multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight

an option, then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

fps rate

(default)

Photos can be taken whenever shutter-release button is pressed.

Photos can be taken even when camera is not in focus. In continuous

mode, frame rate slows for improved focus if subject is dark or low con-

trast.

fps rate

+ AF

Focus

Photos can only be taken when in-focus indicator (●) is displayed.

Custom Setting a2: AF-S Priority Selection

This option controls whether photographs can

be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus

priority) or whenever the shutter-release button is

pressed (release priority) in single-servo AF. No

matter which option is selected, focus will lock if

the in-focus indicator (●) is displayed when the

shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Highlight a2 AF-S mode priority

in the second level of the CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi selector to

the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then

press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Focus

(default)

Photos can only be taken when in-focus indicator (●) is displayed.

Release Photos can be taken whenever shutter-release button is pressed.

185

Custom Setting a3: Pattern Selection in Group Dynamic AF

This option controls how focus areas are grouped

in group dynamic-AF (

79) and whether the

camera gives priority to the subject in the center

focus area of the selected group. Highlight a3

Group dynamic AF in the second level of the

CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi selector

to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then

press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Focus areas are grouped in pattern 1 ( 187). Camera focuses

on subject in center focus area of selected group. Because camera

does not have to select focus area, less time is required for focus

operation. If subject moves out of center focus area, camera will

focus based on information from other focus areas in same group.

Center focus area of selected group is highlighted in top control

panel.

Pattern 1/

Center area

(default)

Focus areas are grouped in pattern 1 ( 187). Camera automati-

cally selects focus area containing principal subject closest to cam-

era in current focus area group. If subject moves out of selected

focus area, camera will focus based on information from other

focus areas in same group.

Pattern 1/

Closest subject

Pattern 2/

As for Pattern 1/Center area, except that focus areas are

Center area grouped in pattern 2 ( 187).

Pattern 2/

As for Pattern 1/Closest subject, except that focus areas are

Closest subject grouped in pattern 2 ( 187).

186

Focus areas are grouped as follows (illustrations show the display in the top

control panel):

Pattern 1

Pattern 2^*

Top

Left^†Center1 Center2 Right^†

Bottom

Center

area

Left^†Center Right^†

Bottom

Top

Left^†Center1 Center2 Right^†

Bottom

Closest

subject

Left^†Center Right^†

Bottom

*The center focus-area group is selected by pressing the center of the multi selector

once to activate the current center focus-area group and then pressing the center of

the multi selector to toggle between “center 1” and “center 2.” “Center 2” is only

available when Center AF area (the default option) is selected for Center button

(Custom Setting f1)>Shooting mode.

†The focus areas outside the high-speed crop are not displayed when high-speed crop

is on.

187

Custom Setting a4: Focus Tracking with Lock-On

This option controls how autofocus adjusts to

sudden large changes in the distance to the sub-

ject. Highlight a4 Lock-on in the second level

of the CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi

selector to the right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Option

Long

Description

Camera waits before adjusting focus when distance to subject

changes abruptly. Prevents camera from refocusing when sub-

ject is brieﬂy obscured by objects passing through frame. Setting

refers to length of time before camera refocuses.

Normal (default)

Short

Camera immediately adjusts focus when distance to subject

changes abruptly. Use when photographing series of subjects at

varying distances in quick succession.

Off

Custom Setting a5: AF Activation

This option controls whether both the shutter-

release button and the AF-ON buttons can be

used to initiate autofocus or whether autofocus

is only initiated when one of the AF-ON buttons is

pressed. Highlight a5 AF activation in the sec-

ond level of the CSM menu ( 180) and press the

multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight

an option, then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Shutter/AF-ON Autofocus can be performed with AF-ON buttons or by pressing

(default) shutter-release button halfway.

AF-ON only Autofocus can only be performed using AF-ON buttons.

Description

188

Custom Setting a6: Focus Area Illumination

The options in this menu control when the focus

areas are illuminated and for how long. Highlight

a6 Focus area illum in the second level of the

CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi selector

to the right. Press the multi selector up or down

to highlight an option, then press the multi se-

lector to the right.

Option

Description

Controls whether active focus area is displayed

in manual focus mode. Press multi selector up

or down to highlight option, press to right to

select:

Manual

• On (default): Active focus area displayed when

shutter-release button is pressed halfway.

• Off: Focus areas not displayed in manual fo-

cus mode.

focus mode

Controls whether active focus area is displayed

in C^H(continuous high-speed) or CL (continu-

ous low-speed) mode. Press multi selector up

or down to highlight option, press to right to

select:

Continuous

mode

• On (default): Active focus area displayed in

continuous mode.

• Off: Focus areas not displayed in continuous mode.

Determines how long active focus area is dis-

played when selected. Press multi selector up

or down to highlight option, press to right to

select:

• 0.2s (default): Active focus area displayed for

0.2s.

When

selected

• 1s: Active focus area displayed for 1s.

189

Custom Setting a7: Focus Area Select

By default, the focus-area display is bounded by

the four outer focus areas so that, for example,

pressing the multi selector up when the top focus

area is selected has no effect. Focus-area selection

can be changed to “wrap around.” Highlight a7

Focus area in the second level of the CSM menu

(

180) and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

No wrap

(default)

Wrap-around disabled.

Focus-area selection “wraps around” from top to bottom, bottom to

top, right to left, and left to right.

Wrap

Custom Setting a8: Vertical AF-ON Button Function

This option determines what functions are as-

signed to the AF-ON button for vertical shooting.

Highlight a8 Vertical AF-ON in the second level

of the CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi

selector to the right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Option

Description

AF-ON+ Pressing vertical AF-ON button initiates autofocus. Focus area can be

focus area selected by pressing vertical AF-ON button and rotating sub-command

(default) dial.

AF-ON Pressing vertical AF-ON button initiates autofocus.

AE/AF-L+ As for AF-ON+focus area, except that pressing vertical AF-ON button

focus area locks focus and exposure.

AE/AF-L Pressing vertical AF-ON button locks focus and exposure.

Focus area can be selected by pressing vertical AF-ON button and rotat-

ing sub-command dial. Button can not be used for other functions.

Focus area

190

Custom Setting b1: ISO Auto Control

If On is selected for this option, the camera will automatically adjust ISO sen-

sitivity when necessary to help ensure optimal exposure. This option is not

available at ISO sensitivities over 800.

Highlight b1 ISO auto in the second level of the

CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi selector

to the right. Press the multi selector up or down

to highlight an option, then press to the right to

make a selection.

Option

Description

ISO sensitivity remains ﬁxed at value selected by user, regardless of

whether optimal exposure can be achieved at current exposure set-

tings.

Off

(default)

If optimal exposure can not be achieved at ISO sensitivity selected

by user, ISO sensitivity is adjusted to compensate, to minimum ap-

proximately equivalent to ISO 100 and maximum selected using Max.

Sensitivity option. In exposure modes P and A, ISO sensitivity will be

adjusted if photo would be overexposed at shutter speed of

8,000 s or

underexposed at value selected for Min. Shutter Speed. Otherwise

camera adjusts ISO sensitivity when limits of exposure metering system

are exceeded (mode S) or when optimum exposure can not be achieved

at shutter speed and aperture selected by user (mode M). ISO sensitivity

can not be set to values over 800 while this option is in effect.

Menu shown at right is displayed. Press multi

selector up or down to highlight desired ISO

Max.

sensitivity sensitivity and press to right to return to ISO

auto menu.

Menu shown at right is displayed. Press multi

selector up or down to highlight desired shutter

speed and press to right to return to ISO auto

menu.

Min.

shutter

speed

191

When On is selected, the rear control-panel dis-

play shows ISO-AUTO and ISO-A appears in the

viewﬁnder sidebar. These indicators ﬂash when

ISO sensitivity is altered from the value selected

by the user.

Custom Setting b2: ISO Sensitivity Step Value

This option determines whether adjustments to

ISO sensitivity are made in increments equivalent

to ¹3 EV (1/3 step, the default option), ½EV (1/2

step), or 1EV (1 step). Highlight b2 ISO step

value in the second level of the CSM menu (

180) and press the multi selector to the right.

Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Custom Setting b3: EV Steps for Exposure Control

This option determines whether adjustments to

shutter speed, aperture, and bracketing are made

in increments equivalent to 3 EV (1/3 step, the

default option), ½EV (1/2 step), or 1EV (1 step).

Highlight b3 EV step in the second level of the

CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi selector

to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then

press to the right to make a selection.

Bank Select

If a shooting menu bank in which ISO sensitivity has been set to a value over 800 is

chosen after On is selected for Custom Setting b1, ISO sensitivity will not be adjusted

automatically. ISO sensitivity will also not be adjusted automatically if a Custom Set-

tings bank in which On is selected for Custom Setting b1 is chosen after ISO sensitivity

has been set to a value over 800.

High ISO NR ( 176)

Noise is more likely to appear in photographs taken at higher sensitivities. To reduce

noise at ISO sensitivities of ISO 400 equivalent and above, turn on the High ISO NR

option in the shooting menu.

192

Custom Setting b4: EV Steps for Exposure Compensation

This option determines whether adjustments to

exposure compensation are made in increments

equivalent to ¹³EV (1/3 step, the default option),

½EV (1/2 step), or 1EV (1 step). Highlight b4

Exposure comp. EV in the second level of the

CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi selector

to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then

press to the right to make a selection.

Custom Setting b5: Easy Exposure Compensation

This option controls whether the

button is needed to set exposure

compensation ( 99). If On is selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure

display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0.

Highlight b5 Exposure comp. in the second level

of the CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi

selector to the right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Off Exposure compensation set by pressing

button and rotating main

(default) command dial.

Exposure compensation set by rotating command dial only. Dial used de-

pends on option selected for Custom Setting f6> Change main/sub.

Command dials (Custom Setting f6)>Change main/sub

Off

Sub-command dial

Main command dial

Sub-command dial

Main command dial

Sub-command dial

N/A

193

Custom Setting b6: Center Weight Area

When calculating exposure, center-weighted

metering assigns the greatest weight to a circle

in the center of the frame. The diameter (φ) of

this circle can be selected from 6, 8, 10, and

13mm (the default option is 8mm; note that the

diameter is ﬁxed at 8mm when a non-CPU lens

is used, regardless of the setting selected for Non-CPU lens data in the

shooting menu, and that a setting of 13mm is equivalent to 10mm when

high-speed crop is on). Highlight b6 Center weight in the second level of

the CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then press to the right to

make a selection.

Custom Setting b7: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure

Use this option to ﬁne-tune the exposure value

selected by the camera. Exposure can be ﬁne

tuned separately for each metering method by

from +1 to –1EV in steps of 6 EV. Highlight b7

Fine tune exposure in the second level of the

CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi selector

to the right. A message will be displayed warning

that the

icon does not appear when exposure

is altered; press the multi selector up or down to

highlight Yes and press the multi selector to the

right (select No to exit without altering exposure).

Press the multi selector up or down to highlight a

metering method and press the multi selector to

the right to display a list of exposure values. Press

the multi selector up or down to highlight an op-

tion, then press to the right to make a selection.

Fine-Tuning Exposure

Exposure can be ﬁne-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank. Note that

as the exposure compensation icon ( ) is not displayed, the only way to determine

whether exposure has been altered is to view the ﬁne-tuning menu. Exposure com-

pensation ( 99) is recommended in most situations.

194

Custom Setting c1: AE Lock Buttons

This option determines what controls lock expo-

sure. Highlight c1 AE lock in the second level

of the CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi

selector to the right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Option

Description

AE-L/AF-L button

Exposure can only be locked by pressing AE-L/AF-L button.

(default)

Exposure can be locked by pressing AE-L/AF-L button or by

pressing shutter-release button halfway.

+ release button

Custom Setting c2: Assignment of AE-L/AF-L Button

This option controls the behavior of the AE-L/AF-L

button. Highlight c2 AE-L/AF-L in the second

level of the CSM menu ( 180) and press the

multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector

up or down to highlight an option, then press to

the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

AE/AF lock

(default)

Both focus and exposure lock while AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.

AE lock only Exposure locks while AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Focus is unaffected.

Exposure locks when AE-L/AF-L button is pressed and remains locked

until button is pressed again, shutter is released or exposure meters

turn off.

AE lock

hold/reset

Exposure locks when AE-L/AF-L button is pressed and remains locked

until button is pressed again or exposure meters turn off.

AE lock hold

AF lock

AF-On

Focus locks while AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Exposure is unaffected.

AE-L/AF-L button performs same function as AF-ON button.

195

Custom Setting c3: Auto Meter-off Delay

This option controls how long the camera con-

tinues to meter exposure when no operations are

performed: 4s, 6s (the default option), 8s, or 16s

or until the camera is turned off (No limit). High-

light c3 Auto meter-off in the second level of the

CSM menu ( 180) and press the multi selector

to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then

press to the right to make a selection. Choose a shorter meter-off delay for

longer battery life.

Custom Setting c4: Self-Timer Delay

This option controls the length of the shutter-

release delay in self-timer mode. Shutter-release

can be delayed by approximately 2s, 5s, 10s (the

default option), or 20s. Highlight c4 Self-timer

in the second level of the CSM menu ( 180) and

press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option,

then press to the right to make a selection.

Custom Setting c5: Monitor off Delay

This option controls how long the monitor remains

on when no operations are performed: 10s, 20s

(the default option), 1 minute, 5 minutes, or 10

minutes. Highlight c5 Monitor off in the second

level of the CSM menu ( 180) and press the

multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector

up or down to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selec-

tion. Choose a shorter monitor-off delay for longer battery life.

The EH-6 AC Adapter

When the camera is powered by an optional EH-6 AC adapter, exposure meters will

not turn off and the monitor will only power off after ten minutes, regardless of the

options chosen for Custom Settings c3 (Auto meter-off) and c5 (Monitor off).

196

Custom Setting d1: CL-Mode Shooting Speed

This option determines the rate at which photographs can be taken in CL

(continuous low-speed) mode (during interval timer photography, this set-

ting also determines the frame advance rate for single-frame and mirror-up

modes). Shooting speed can be set to values between 1 and 7 frames per

second (fps); the default value is 3fps. Regardless of the setting chosen,

the maximum speed when Hi-speed Crop is Off is 4fps ( 41). The frame

advance rate may drop at slow shutter speeds.

Highlight d1 Shooting speed in the second level

of the CSM menu ( 181) and press the multi

selector to the right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Custom Setting d2: Max No. of Shots Taken in Continuous Shooting

The maximum number of shots that can be taken

in a single burst in continuous mode can be set to

any value between 1 and 60. Highlight d2 Maxi-

mum shots in the second level of the CSM menu

(

181) and press the multi selector to the right.

Press the multi selector up or down to choose the

number of shots, then press to the right to make a selection.

The Memory Buffer ( 44)

The following table shows the maximum number of shots that can be taken before the

memory buffer ﬁlls and shooting slows:

Quality

Uncompressed NEF (RAW)+JPEG

Compressed NEF (RAW)+JPEG

Uncompressed NEF (RAW)

Compressed NEF (RAW)

TIFF RGB

Hi-speed crop: Off

Hi-speed crop: On

JPEG

The above ﬁgures assume that ISO sensitivity is set to ISO 100, long exposure noise

reduction is off ( 175), and that Size priority is selected for JPEG compression (

47).

197

Custom Setting d3: Exposure Delay Mode

Shutter release can be delayed until about 0.4s

after the shutter-release button is pressed, reduc-

ing camera shake in situations in which the least

camera movement could result in blurred photo-

graphs (for example, microscope photography).

Highlight d3 Exp. delay mode in the second

level of the CSM menu ( 181) and press the multi selector to the right.

Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Off

(default)

Shutter is released when shutter-release button is pressed.

Shutter is released about 0.4s after shutter-release button is pressed.

198

Custom Setting d4: File Number Sequence

When a photograph is taken, the camera names

the ﬁle new by adding one to the last ﬁle number

used. This option controls whether ﬁle numbering

continues from the last number used when a new

folder is created, the memory card is formatted,

or a new memory card is inserted in the camera.

Highlight d4 File No. Seq. in the second level of the CSM menu ( 181) and

press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to

highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Off File numbering reset to 0001 when new folder is created, memory card is

(default) formatted or new memory card is inserted in camera.

When new folder is created, memory card is formatted, or new memory

card inserted in camera, ﬁle numbering continues from last number used or

from largest number in current folder, whichever is higher. If photograph

is taken when current folder contains photograph numbered 9999, new

folder will be created automatically and ﬁle numbering will begin again

from 0001.

As for On, except that next photograph taken is assigned ﬁle number by

adding one to largest ﬁle number in current folder. If selected folder con-

tains no photographs, ﬁle numbering reset to 0001.

Reset

Custom Setting d5: Control Panel/Viewﬁnder Display

The options in this menu control the information

displayed in the viewﬁnder and rear control panel.

Highlight d5 Cntrl panel/ﬁnder in the second

level of the CSM menu ( 181) and press the

multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector

up or down to highlight an option, then press the

multi selector to the right.

199

Option

Description

Controls whether rear control panel shows ISO

sensitivity or number of exposures remaining.

Press multi selector up or down to highlight op-

tion, press to right to select:

• ISO sensitivity (default): Rear panel shows

ISO sensitivity.

Rear

control

panel

• Exposures remaining: Rear panel shows

number of exposures remaining. ISO sensitivity displayed only while

ISO button is pressed.

Controls whether viewﬁnder shows frame count

or number of exposures remaining (note that

regardless of option selected, number of frames

that can be stored in memory buffer will be

shown while shutter-release button is pressed).

Press multi selector up or down to highlight op-

tion, press to right to select:

Viewﬁnder

display

• Frame count (default): Viewﬁnder shows frame count.

• Exposures remaining: Viewﬁnder shows number of exposures re-

maining.

Custom Setting d6: LCD Illumination

This option controls the control panel backlights

(LCD illuminators). Highlight d6 Illumination in

the second level of the CSM menu ( 181) and

press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option,

then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Lamp on switch Control panels illuminate only while power switch is rotated to

(default)

position.

Control panels illuminate whenever exposure meters are active

(note that this increases drain on battery).

Any button

200

Custom Setting e1: Flash Sync Speed Setting

This option controls ﬂash sync speed. Options

range from ½50 s (1/250s, the default setting)

and 60 s (1/60s). To enable auto FP high-speed

sync when using an SB-800 or SB-600 Speedlight,

select 1/250s (Auto FP) (if an SB-800 or SB-600

is not attached when this option is selected, ﬂash

sync speed will be set to ½50 s). When the camera shows a shutter speed of

½50 s in exposure mode P or A, Auto FP High-Speed Sync will be activated if

the actual shutter speed is faster than ½50 s.

Highlight e1 Flash sync speed in the second level of the CSM menu ( 181)

and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down

to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.

Custom Setting e2: Slowest Speed When Using Flash

This option determines the slowest shutter speed

possible when using front- or rear-curtain sync

or red-eye reduction in programmed auto or

aperture-priority auto exposure mode (regardless

of the setting chosen, shutter speeds can be as

slow as 30s in shutter-priority auto and manual

exposure modes or when the ﬂash is set to slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync,

or red-eye reduction with slow sync). Options range from 60 s (1/60s, the

default setting) and 30s (30s).

Highlight e2 Flash shutter speed in the second level of the CSM menu (

181) and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or

down to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.

Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit

To ﬁx shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or manual expo-

sure modes, select the shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed (30s or

). An X will be displayed in the ﬂash sync indicator in the top control panel.

201

Custom Setting e3: AA Flash Mode

This option controls whether ﬂash level is auto-

matically adjusted for aperture when an external

exposure meter is used with an SB-80DX or SB-

28DX Speedlight (in the case of the SB-800, the

ﬂash mode chosen with the Speedlight is used

regardless of the option chosen for Custom Set-

ting e3). Highlight e3 AA ﬂash mode in the second level of the CSM menu

(

181) and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Flash level automatically adjusted for aperture when external exposure me-

(default) ter is used with SB-80DX or SB-28DX Speedlight (auto aperture).^*

Off Aperture speciﬁed manually using Speedlight controls (non-TTL auto).

*To use auto aperture with non-CPU lenses, specify maximum aperture of lens using

Non-CPU lens data option in shooting menu.

Custom Setting e4: Preview Button Activates Modeling Flash

This option determines whether optional Speed-

lights that support the Creative Lighting System

(CLS) emit a modeling ﬂash when the depth-of-

ﬁeld preview button is pressed. Highlight e4

Modeling ﬂash in the second level of the CSM

menu ( 181) and press the multi selector to the

right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then press

to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

(default)

Modeling ﬂash is emitted when depth-of-ﬁeld is previewed ( 87).

Off No modeling ﬂash emitted when depth-of-ﬁeld preview button is pressed.

202

Custom Setting e5: Auto Bracketing Set

This option controls what settings are affected

when auto bracketing is in effect. Highlight e5

Auto BKT set in the second level of the CSM

menu ( 181) and press the multi selector to

the right. Press the multi selector up or down

to highlight an option, then press to the right to

make a selection.

Option

Description

AE & ﬂash

(default)

Camera performs exposure and ﬂash-level bracketing.

AE only

Camera performs exposure bracketing only.

Camera performs ﬂash-level bracketing only.

Flash only

WB bracketing Camera performs white balance bracketing.

White Balance Bracketing

White balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or

NEF+JPEG.

203

Custom Setting e6: Auto Bracketing in M Exposure Mode

This option controls what settings are affected

when AE & ﬂash or AE only is selected for

Custom Setting e5 in manual exposure mode.

Highlight e6 Manual mode bkting in the sec-

ond level of the CSM menu ( 181) and press the

multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector

up or down to highlight an option, then press to

the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Flash/speed Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e5 set to AE only) or

(default)

shutter speed and ﬂash level (Custom Setting e5 set to AE & ﬂash).

Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom Setting e5 set to

AE only) or shutter speed, aperture, and ﬂash level (Custom Setting

e5 set to AE & ﬂash).

Flash/speed/

aperture

Flash/

Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e5 set to AE only) or aper-

aperture ture and ﬂash level (Custom Setting e5 set to AE & ﬂash).

Flash only Camera varies ﬂash level only (Custom Setting e5 set to AE & ﬂash).

• If no ﬂash is attached when Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) is on, camera will vary ISO

sensitivity only, regardless of setting selected.

• Flash bracketing performed only with i-TTL, D-TTL, or AA ﬂash control.

Custom Setting e7: Auto Bracketing Order

This option controls the order in which bracketing

is performed. Highlight e7 Auto BKT order in

the second level of the CSM menu ( 181) and

press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option,

then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

MTR>under>over Bracketing performed in order described in “Bracketing” (

(default) 100).

Under>MTR>over Bracketing proceeds in order from lowest to highest value.

Description

204

Custom Setting e8: Auto Bracketing Selection Method

This option controls how the bracketing program

is selected. Highlight e8 Auto BKT selection in

the second level of the CSM menu ( 181) and

press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option,

then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Manual

value select

(default)

Pressing

button, rotate main command dial to select number of

shots, sub-command dial to select bracketing increment.

Press button and rotate main command dial to turn bracketing

on and off. Press button and rotate sub-command dial to select

number of shots and bracketing increment.

Preset

value select

Custom Setting f1: Multi Selector Center Button

This option determines what operations can be

performed by pressing the center of the multi

selector. Highlight f1 Center button in the sec-

ond level of the CSM menu ( 181) and press the

multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector

up or down to highlight an option, then press the

multi selector to the right.

Shooting Mode

This option controls what operation can be per-

formed by pressing the center of the multi se-

lector when the camera is in shooting mode.

Using the Multi Selector

The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector

lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.

205

Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Pressing center of multi selector selects center focus area or center

focus-area group (group dynamic-AF). If Pattern 2 is selected for

Custom Setting a3 (Group dynamic AF), center of multi selector

can be used to toggle between center focus area groups.

Center AF area

(default)

Illuminate AF Pressing center of multi selector illuminates active focus area or

area

focus-area group (group dynamic-AF) in viewﬁnder.^*

Pressing center of multi selector has no effect when camera is in

shooting mode.^*

Not used

*Center of multi selector can not be used to toggle between center focus-area groups

when Pattern 2 is selected for Custom Setting a3 (Group dynamic AF).

Playback Mode

This option controls what operation is performed

when the center of the multi selector is pressed

in playback mode. Press the multi selector up or

down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Thumbnail on/off Press center of multi selector to toggle between single-image

(default)

and thumbnail playback.

Press center of multi selector to turn histogram display on and

off.

Histogram on/off

Press center of multi selector to zoom

in on image, press again to return to

full-frame display or thumbnail play-

back. When this option is selected,

menu of zoom settings shown at right

is displayed. Choose from Low magni-

ﬁcation, Medium magniﬁcation, and

High magniﬁcation.

Zoom on/off

206

Custom Setting f2: When Multi Selector Is Pressed

If desired, the multi selector can be used to ac-

tivate the exposure meters or initiate autofocus.

Highlight f2 Multi selector in the second level

of the CSM menu ( 181) and press the multi

selector to the right. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option, then press to the

right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Do nothing

(default)

Multi selector does not activate exposure meters or initiate

autofocus.

Reset mtr-off delay Pressing multi selector activates exposure meters.

In AF-S or AF-C mode, pressing multi selector activates expo-

sure meters. Camera focuses while multi selector is pressed.

Initiate autofocus

Custom Setting f3: Role of Multi Selector in Full-Frame Playback

By default, pressing the multi selector up or down

during playback displays the other images on the

memory card, while pressing the multi selector

left or right changes the photo information dis-

played. These roles can be reversed using Custom

Setting f3. Highlight f3 Photo info/playback in

the second level of the CSM menu ( 181) and press the multi selector to

the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then

press to the right to make a selection.

Option

/PB▲▼

Description

Press multi selector up or down to display additional images, left or

right to change photo info displayed.

Info

(default)

Press multi selector up or down to change photo info displayed,

left or right to display additional images.

Info▲▼/PB

207

Custom Setting f4: FUNC. Button Press

This option controls the operation performed

when the FUNC. button is pressed. Highlight f4

FUNC. button in the second level of the CSM

menu ( 181) and press the multi selector to

the right. Press the multi selector up or down

to highlight an option, then press to the right to

make a selection.

Option

Description

None

(default)

No operation is performed when FUNC. button is pressed.

If attached Speedlight supports Creative Lighting System (CLS), ﬂash

value locks when FUNC. button is pressed. Press again to cancel FV

lock.

FV lock

Same as

AE-L/AF-L

FUNC. button performs same functions as AE-L/AF-L button.

Flash off Flash will not ﬁre in photos taken while FUNC. button is pressed.

While FUNC. button is pressed, all shots in exposure or ﬂash bracketing

program will be taken each time shutter-release button is pressed. In

continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed modes, camera will

repeat bracketing burst while shutter-release button is held down. If

white-balance bracketing is selected, camera will take photos at up

to 8fps (single or continuous high-speed mode) or 1–7fps (continu-

ous low-speed mode) and perform white balance bracketing on each

frame.

Bracketing

burst

Matrix

metering

Matrix metering activated while FUNC. button is pressed.

Center-weighted metering activated while FUNC. button is pressed.

Spot metering activated while FUNC. button is pressed.

Center-

weighted

Spot

metering

208

Custom Setting f5: FUNC. Button + Command Dials

This option controls the operation performed by

pressing the FUNC. button and rotating the com-

mand dials. Highlight f5 FUNC. + command in

the second level of the CSM menu ( 181) and

press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi

selector up or down to highlight an option, then

press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

None

No operation is performed if command dials are rotated while FUNC.

(default) button is pressed.

FUNC. button and main command dial can be used to turn high-

speed crop mode on and off ( 41). Hi-speed crop mode can not be

changed after ﬁrst shot in multiple exposure.

Hi-speed

crop

If FUNC. button is pressed when rotating command dials, changes

to shutter speed (exposure modes S and M) and aperture (exposure

modes A and M) are made in increments of 1EV.

1 step spd/

aperture

Non-CPU FUNC. button and command dials can be used to specify focal length

lens data and aperture of non-CPU lenses ( 131).

209

Custom Setting f6: Customize Command Dials

This option controls the operation of the main

and sub-command dials. Highlight f6 Command

dials in the second level of the CSM menu (

181) and press the multi selector to the right.

Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an

option, then press the multi selector to the right.

Option

Description

Controls direction of command dials when setting

ﬂexible program, shutter speed, easy exposure

compensation, exposure mode, exposure com-

pensation value, bracketing increment, and ﬂash

sync mode. Press multi selector up or down to

highlight option, press to right to select:

Rotate

direction

• Normal (default): Normal command dial operation.

• Reverse: Reverses rotation of command dials.

Exchanges functions of main and sub-command

dials when setting shutter speed and aperture.

Press multi selector up or down to highlight op-

tion, press to right to select:

Change

• Off (default): Main command dial controls shut-

ter speed, sub-command dial controls aperture.

• On: Main command dial controls aperture, sub-

command dial controls shutter speed.

main/sub

Controls whether changes to aperture are made

using lens aperture ring or command dials. Re-

gardless of setting chosen, lens ring must be used

to set aperture for non-CPU lenses, command di-

als to set aperture for type G lenses not equipped

with aperture ring. Press multi selector up or

down to highlight option, press to right to select:

Aperture

setting

• Sub-command dial (default): Aperture can only be adjusted with sub-

command dial (or main command dial if Change main/sub is On).

• Aperture ring: Aperture can only be adjusted using lens aperture ring.

Camera aperture display shows aperture in increments of 1EV. This

option is selected automatically when non-CPU lens is attached.

210

Option

Description

Controls functions performed by command dials

during playback or when menus are displayed.

Press multi selector up or down to highlight op-

tion, press to right to select:

• Off (default): Multi selector used to choose

picture displayed, highlight thumbnails, and

navigate menus.

• On: Main command dial performs same function as pressing multi

selector left or right. Sub-command dial performs same function as

pressing multi selector up or down. Note that this option has no effect

on the roles played by the command dials during playback zoom.

Menus

and

playback

Single-image playback: main command dial is used to choose picture

displayed, sub-command dial to display additional photo information.

Thumbnail playback: main command dial moves cursor left or right,

sub-command dial moves cursor up or down.

Menu navigation: main command dial moves highlight bar up or

down. Rotate sub-command dial to right to display sub-menu, to left

to return to previous menu. To make selection, press multi selector to

right, press center of multi selector, or press

button.

211

Custom Setting f7: Setting Method for Buttons and Dials

This option allows adjustments that are normally

made by holding a button and rotating a com-

mand dial to be made by rotating the command

dial after the button is released. Highlight f7 But-

tons and dials in the second level of the CSM

menu ( 181) and press the multi selector to the

right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then press

to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

Default Changes to settings made by rotating command dial while button is held

(default) down.

Settings can be changed by rotating command dial after button is released.

To exit, press button again, press shutter-release button halfway, press

, ISO, QUAL, or WB button, or (except when No limit is select-

ed for Custom Setting c3 or optional adapter is used) wait for about 20s.

Hold

Custom Setting f8: Disable Shutter If No CF Card

This option can be used to enable the shutter

release when no memory card is inserted in the

camera. Note that when photographs are being

captured to a computer using Camera Control

Pro (available separately), photographs are not

recorded to the camera memory card and the

shutter release will be enabled regardless of the

setting chosen for this option.

Highlight f8 No CF card? in the second level of the CSM menu ( 181) and

press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to

highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.

Option

Description

(default)

Shutter-release button disabled when no memory card is inserted.

Off Shutter-release button enabled even when no memory card is inserted.

212

The Setup Menu

Camera Setup

The setup menu contains three pages of options:

Option

Format

214

215

LCD brightness

Mirror lock-up

Video mode

215

216

World time

Language

Image comment

Auto image rotation

Recent settings

Voice memo

217

218

219

150

Voice memo overwrite

Voice memo button

Audio output

151

153

USB

220

Dust off ref photo

Battery info

221–222

223

Wireless LAN^*

223–231

231

Image authentication

Save/load settings

Firmware version

232

*Available only when optional WT-2/2A or WT-1/1A

wireless transmitter is connected.

Using the Multi Selector

The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector

lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.

213

Format

Memory cards must be formatted before ﬁrst use.

Formatting memory cards is also an effective way

of deleting all pictures on the card. To format

a memory card, highlight Format in the setup

menu ( 213) and press the multi selector to

the right. Press the multi selector up or down to

highlight one of the following options and then

press the

button:

Option

Description

No Exit without formatting memory card.

Format memory card. Message shown at right dis-

played while formatting is in progress. Do not turn

the camera off, remove the batteries or memory

Yes

card, or unplug the AC adapter (available sepa-

rately) until formatting is complete and setup

menu is displayed.

During Formatting

Do not remove the memory card, remove the battery, or unplug the AC adapt-

er (available separately) while formatting is in progress.

Before Formatting

Formatting memory cards permanently deletes all data they contain, including

hidden and protected pictures and any other data that may be on the card.

Before formatting, be sure to transfer to a computer any pictures you would like to

keep.

FAT 32

The D2Xs supports FAT 32, allowing use of memory cards with capacities of over 2GB.

FAT 16 is used when reformatting cards already formatted in FAT 16.

Two-Button Format

Memory cards can also be formatted with the

(

and ) buttons ( 23).

214

LCD Brightness

To adjust monitor brightness, highlight LCD

brightness in the setup menu ( 213) and press

the multi selector to the right. The menu shown

at right will be displayed. Press the multi selector

up to increase brightness, down to decrease. The

number to the right of the display indicates the

current brightness level, with +2 the brightest setting and –2 the darkest.

Press the multi selector to the right to complete the operation and return to

the setup menu.

Mirror Lock-up

This option is used to lock the mirror in the up

position to allow inspection or cleaning of the

low-pass ﬁlter that protects the image sensor.

See “Technical Notes: Caring for the Camera”

(

253). Highlighting this option and pressing

the multi selector to the right displays the menu

shown above. If the multi selector is pressed to the right again, a row of

dashes (“– – – – – – ”) will be displayed in the top control panel. To raise the

mirror, press the shutter-release button. The mirror will be locked in the up

position the row of dashes will blink. The mirror will be lowered when the

camera is turned off. Mirror lock up is not available when the battery level is

or lower or while a multiple exposure is being recorded.

215

Video Mode

Before connecting your camera to a video device

such as a television or VCR ( 234), choose a vid-

eo mode setting that matches the video standard

used in the device. Highlight Video mode in the

setup menu ( 209) and press the multi selector

to the right. Press the multi selector up or down

to highlight an option, then press to the right to

make a selection.

Option

Description

NTSC Use when connecting camera to NTSC devices.

Use when connecting camera to PAL devices. Note that number of pixels in

output is selectively reduced, causing drop in resolution.

PAL

World Time

World time is used to set the camera clock to

the current date and time. See “First Steps: Step

3—Basic setup” ( 17).

Language

Choose the language for camera menus and

messages from

(German), English, Español (Spanish), Français

(French), (Korean), Italiano (Italian),

(Chinese), Deutsch

(Japanese), Nederlands (Dutch), and Svenska

(Swedish). See “First Steps: Step 3—Basic setup”

(

18).

Video Mode

The default video standard varies with the country or region of purchase.

216

Image Comment

Using this option, brief texts comment can be

added to photographs as they are taken. Com-

ments can be viewed when the photographs are

displayed using Capture NX (available separately)

or PictureProject. The ﬁrst twelve letters of the

comment are also visible on the fourth page of

the photo information display ( 140).

Highlight Image comment in the setup menu ( 213) and press the multi

selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an op-

tion, then press to the right to make a selection.

Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.

Input comment: The following dialog will be displayed. Enter a comment as

described below.

Keyboard area

Comment area

Use multi selector to high-

Comment appears here.

light letters, press center

To move cursor, press

button and use multi se-

lector.

of multi selector to select.

To move the cursor in the comment area, press the

button and use the

multi selector. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use the

multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and

press the center of the multi selector. To delete the character at the current

cursor position, press the

changing the comment, press the

button. To return to the setup menu without

button.

Comments can be up to thirty-six characters long. Any characters after the

thirty-sixth will be deleted.

After editing the comment, press

to return to the image comment menu.

Attach comment: A comment is added to all photographs taken when this

option is checked (✔). Highlight this option and press the multi selector to

the right to toggle the check mark on or off.

217

Auto Image Rotation

The D2Xs is equipped with a built-in sensor that detects camera orientation.

Information from this sensor can be embedded in photographs as they are

taken, allowing portrait (tall) orientation photos to be rotated automatically

during playback or when the pictures are displayed in Capture NX (available

separately) or PictureProject.

Highlight Auto image rotation in the setup

menu ( 213) and press the multi selector to

the right. Press the multi selector up or down

to highlight an option, then press to the right to

make a selection.

Option

Description

Camera records whether shots are in landscape (wide) orientation, portrait

(tall) orientation with the camera rotated 90° clockwise, or portrait orienta-

tion with the camera rotated 90° counter-clockwise.^*If On is selected for

Rotate tall during playback ( 167), portrait orientation photos will be

displayed in portrait orientation in camera monitor.

(default)

Landscape (wide)

orientation

Camera rotated 90°

clockwise

Camera rotated 90°

counter-clockwise

Camera orientation not recorded. PictureProject and Capture NX display

all photographs in landscape (wide) orientation. Choose this option when

taking pictures with lens pointing up or down.

Off

*In C^H(continuous high speed) and CL (continuous low speed) modes ( 43), orienta-

tion recorded for ﬁrst shot applies to all images in same burst, even if camera orienta-

tion is changed during shooting.

218

Recent Settings

The following options are available:

Option

Description

Select Yes to lock Recent Settings menu so

that no items can be added or removed, No

to unlock menu.

Lock

Select Yes to delete all items from Recent

Settings menu, No to exit without deleting

items. Selecting Yes deletes recent settings

even if menu is locked.

Delete

recent

settings

The Recent Settings menu can be customized by deleting all recent settings

using Delete recent settings, selecting up to eight options in the shooting

and Custom Settings menus in the order in which you wish them to appear,

and then locking the menu using the Lock menu option. If more than eight

items are selected before the menu is locked, only the eight most recent

items will be displayed.

Voice Memo

Voice memo contains options for recording voice

memos in shooting mode. See “Voice Memos”

(

150).

Voice Memo Overwrite

The option selected for Voice memo overwrite

determines whether the voice memo for the last

photograph recorded can be overwritten when

the camera is in shooting mode. See “Voice

Memos” ( 151).

219

Voice Memo Button

This option controls operation of the button.

See “Voice Memos” ( 151).

Audio Output

This menu contains output options for voice

memos. See “Voice Memos” ( 153).

USB

Before connecting the camera to a computer via

USB ( 236), select the appropriate USB option

as determined by the computer operating system

and the software used.

Operating system

PictureProject

Camera Control Pro

Windows XP Home Edition

Windows XP Professional

Choose PTP or

Mass Storage

Choose PTP

Mac OS X^*

Windows 2000 Professional

Choose

Mass Storage

Windows Millennium Edition (Me)

Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)

Not supported

*Mac OS X version 10.3.9 or later required for Camera Control Pro.

The default setting for USB is Mass Storage. To change the USB setting,

highlight USB in the setup menu ( 213) and press the multi selector to the

right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight the desired option,

then press the multi selector to the right.

220

Dust Off Ref Photo

This option is used to acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off function

in Capture NX (available separately; for more information, see the Capture

NX User’s Manual).

Dust off ref photo is only available when a CPU lens is mounted on

the camera. We recommend using a lens with a focal length of at least

50mm. If using a zoom lens, zoom in to the maximum telephoto posi-

tion.

Highlight Dust off ref photo in the setup

menu ( 213) and press the multi selector to

the right. The menu shown at right will be

displayed.

Press the multi selector to the right. Camera

settings will be adjusted automatically. The

message shown at right will be displayed, and

will be displayed in the viewﬁnder and

control panels.

Top control panel

Rear control panel

Viewﬁnder

To cancel the operation and return to the setup menu, press the

but-

ton or press the multi selector to the left. The operation will also be

cancelled when the camera or monitor is turned off.

Image Dust Off

The Image Dust Off feature in Capture NX (available separately) processes NEF (RAW)

photographs to remove the effects of dust in the camera imaging system by comparing

the images to the data acquired with Dust off ref photo. It is not available with TIFF

(RGB) or JPEG images. The same reference data can be used for NEF (RAW) photo-

graphs taken with different lenses or at different apertures.

221

With the lens ten centimeters (four inches)

from a bright, featureless white object, frame

the object so that nothing else is visible in

the viewﬁnder and press the shutter-release

button halfway. In autofocus mode, focus

will automatically be set to inﬁnity; in manual

focus mode, set focus to inﬁnity manually before pressing the shutter-

release button. If using the aperture ring to set aperture, choose the

minimum setting (largest f/-number).

Press the shutter-release button the rest of the

way down to acquire Image Dust Off refer-

ence data (note that noise reduction turns

on automatically when the subject is poorly

lit, increasing the amount of time needed to

record the data). The monitor turns off when

the shutter-release button is pressed.

If the reference object is too bright or too

dark, the camera may be unable to acquire

Image Dust Off reference data and the mes-

sage shown at right will be displayed. Choose

another reference object and repeat the pro-

cess from Step 3.

Image Dust Off Reference Data

Image Dust Off reference data are recorded to the

memory card at an image quality of JPEG Fine and an

image size of Large. When the resulting image is played

back on the camera, a grid pattern is displayed and

voice memos can not be recorded. Files created with

Dust off ref photo can not be viewed using computer

imaging software.

222

Battery Info

To view information on the EN-EL4a rechargeable

Li-ion battery currently inserted in the camera,

highlight Battery info in the setup menu ( 213)

and press the multi selector to the right.

Option

Description

Battery meter Current battery level expressed as a percentage ( 27).

Number of times shutter has been released with current battery

since battery was last charged. Note that camera may sometimes

release shutter without recording photograph, for example when

Picture meter

measuring value for preset white balance.

• Required: due to repeated use and recharging, calibration is

required to ensure that battery level can be measured accurately;

recalibrate battery before charging (see MH-21 Quick Charger

instructions for details).

Calibration

• Not required: calibration not required.

Five-level display showing battery age. 0 (New) indicates that bat-

tery performance has not been affected; 4 (Replace) indicates that

battery has reached end of charging life and should be replaced.

Charging life

Wireless LAN

This option is only available when an optional

WT-2/2A or WT-1/1A wireless transmitter is at-

tached. To adjust wireless LAN settings, highlight

Wireless LAN in the setup menu ( 213) and

press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option

and then press the multi selector to the right. The

options available vary depending on whether the

WT-2/2A or WT-1/1A is attached. See the manual

provided with the wireless transmitter for details.

WT-2/2A

WT-1/1A

223

Wireless LAN Options for the WT-2/2A

Settings for the WT-2/2A differ depending on whether the transmitter is be-

ing used to send data to an ftp server or to connect to a computer running

Camera Control Pro (available separately).

Option

FTP

Camera Control Pro

Choose On

Choose PTP/IP

Required

Wireless LAN system

Choose On

Choose FTP

Required

Not available

Available

Mode

Wireless

Network

settings

TCP/IP

FTP

Required

Not available

Required

Pairing options

Auto send

Not available

Settings

Delete after send?

Send ﬁle as

Send folder

Deselect all?

Settings for the WT-2/2A and WT-1/1A

Even where the same options are available for both devices, wireless LAN settings must

be adjusted separately for the WT-2/2A and WT-1/1A.

USB

When using a wireless transmitter, set the USB option in the camera setup menu to

PTP ( 220).

224

Wireless LAN system

Turn the WT-2/2A on or off. Press the multi se-

lector up or down to highlight an option and then

press the multi selector to the right.

Option

Description

Off

(default)

WT-2/2A off; wireless link unavailable.

WT-2/2A on; wireless link available.

Mode

Press the multi selector up or down to highlight

FTP or PTP/IP and then press the multi selector

to the right.

Option

Description

FTP

(default)

Use when connecting to ftp server.

Use when controlling camera remotely.

Requires Camera Control Pro (available

separately).

PTP/IP

Settings

The settings menu contains the options listed

below. Press the multi selector up or down to

highlight an option and then press the multi se-

lector to the right.

Option

Network settings 226

Pairing options 226

Send ﬁle as

Send folder

Deselect all?

228

Auto send

227

Delete after send? 227

225

Network settings: Adjust settings for connection

to a wireless network. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option and then press the

multi selector to the right.

Option

Description

Wireless, TCP/IP, and FTP settings are stored in one of four banks

(A, B, C, and D). Store settings for different networks in different

banks and switch between them using this menu. Descriptive cap-

tions can be added to bank names as described on page 170.

Choose

settings

Load

Load Wireless, TCP/IP, and FTP settings from camera memory

settings ﬁle? card.

Adjust SSID, ad hoc, encryption, and compatibility settings for con-

nection to wireless network.

Wireless

TCP/IP

FTP

Adjust or view TCP/IP settings, including IP address, DNS, and gate-

way settings.

Enter password and user ID and adjust settings for connection to ftp

server.

Pairing options: Pair the camera with computers

running Camera Control Pro (available separate-

ly). Once paired with the camera, the computer

will automatically connect when Camera Control

Pro is started, allowing the camera to be con-

trolled remotely from the computer. The camera

can store up to ten pairs of connections (note that each computer can control

only one camera at a time, and that each camera can be controlled by only

one computer at a time). Before pairing the camera with a computer, adjust

wireless network settings appropriately.

226

Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option and then press the

multi selector to the right.

Option

Description

Assign name to camera. Camera will be registered with computer

under this name when pairing begins.

Camera

Edit

Edit list of computers with which camera is paired. Computers can

connection be deleted from list or pairing can be suspended by selecting Disable

list (remember to enable pairing before reconnecting).

Auto send: Choose whether to transmit photo-

graphs to the server as they are taken. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option

and then press the multi selector to the right.

Option

Description

Off Photos are not transmitted automatically after shooting. Photos can be

(default) selected for transmission in playback mode.

Photos transmitted to server automatically after recording.

Delete after send: Choose whether to delete

photographs after transmission. Press the multi

selector up or down to highlight an option and

then press the multi selector to the right.

Option

Description

(default)

Photos are not deleted after transmission.

Photos deleted after transmission. Regardless of setting selected for Cus-

tom Setting d4 (File No. Seq.), ﬁle numbering continues from last number

used when new folder is created or memory card inserted.

Yes

227

Send ﬁle as: When sending images taken at set-

tings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG ﬁne, NEF (RAW)

+ JPEG normal, or NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic,

choose whether to send both NEF and JPEG ﬁles

or only the JPEG ﬁles. Press the multi selector up

or down to highlight an option and then press the

multi selector to the right.

Option

Description

NEF(RAW)+JPEG

Send both NEF and JPEG ﬁles.

Send JPEG ﬁles only.

(default)

JPEG only

Send folder: Entire folders can be selected for

transmission to the server. Press the multi selector

up or down to highlight a folder and then press

the multi selector to the right to begin transmis-

sion of the selected folder and all ﬁles it contains.

Deselect all: Remove “send,” “sending,” and

“sent” marking from all images on the memory

card. Press the multi selector up or down to high-

light an option, then press the multi selector to

the right.

Option

Description

Exit without removing “send,” “sending,” and “sent” marking.

Yes Remove “send,” “sending,” and “sent” marking from all images.

228

Wireless LAN Options for the WT-1/1A

The following options are available when the WT-1/1A is connected.

Transceiver

Turn the WT-1/1A transceiver on or off. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option

and then press the multi selector to the right.

Option

Description

Off Transceiver off. Camera can not communi-

(default) cate with server.

Transceiver on. Camera can communicate

with server.

Status

Shows the current status of the link between the

WT-1/1A and the server. Press the multi selector

to the right to return to the wireless LAN menu.

Option

Description

Status of server link.

Status

Link quality Five-level indicator of link quality.

Signal level Five-level indicator of signal strength.

Now sending Name of ﬁle currently being sent.

Remaining Number of frames yet to be sent.

Estimated time needed to send re-

Time left

maining data.

Auto Send

Choose whether to transmit photographs to the

server as they are taken. See “Auto send” (

227).

229

Delete After Send?

Choose whether to delete photographs after

transmission. See “Delete after send” ( 227).

Send File As

When sending images taken at settings of NEF

(RAW) + JPEG ﬁne, NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal,

or NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic, choose whether to

send both NEF and JPEG ﬁles or only the JPEG

ﬁles. See “Send ﬁle as” ( 228).

Send Folder

Entire folders can be selected for transmission to

the server. See “Send folder” ( 228).

Deselect All?

Remove “send,” “sending,” and “sent” marking

from all images on the memory card. See “Dese-

lect all” ( 228).

Settings for the WT-2/2A and WT-1/1A

Even where the same options are available for both devices, wireless LAN settings must

be adjusted separately for the WT-2/2A and WT-1/1A.

USB

When using a wireless transmitter, set the USB option in the camera setup menu to

PTP ( 220).

230

Network Settings

Adjust network settings for connection to the

server. Press the multi selector up or down to

highlight an option and then press the multi se-

lector to the right.

Option

Description

Load

Load Wireless, TCP/IP, and FTP set-

settings ﬁle? tings from camera memory card.

Adjust settings for connection to wire-

less network.

Wireless

Adjust TCP/IP settings, including IP ad-

dress, DNS, and gateway settings.

TCP/IP

Enter password and user ID and adjust

settings for connection to ftp server.

FTP

Image Authentication

Selecting On for this option embeds image au-

thentication information into photographs as they

are taken, allowing alterations to the image to be

detected using Nikon’s optional Image Authenti-

cation software ( 250). To turn image authenti-

cation on or off, highlight Image authentication

in the setup menu ( 213) and press the multi selector to the right. Press the

multi selector up or down to highlight an option and press the multi selector

right to select. Photographs taken with image authentication on are marked

by a icon on page 2 of the playback information display ( 139).

Image Transfer

Modiﬁcations to color proﬁles or IPTC information made in PictureProject during

transfer will be detected by Nikon’s Image Authentication software. Turn auto embed

options off when transferring photographs for use with Image Authentication. Image

authentication information is not embedded in TIFF photographs recorded directly to a

computer using Camera Control Pro (available separately).

Copies

Image authentication information is not embedded in copies created with Trim (

123) or Image overlay ( 118).

231

Save/Load Settings

Select Save settings to save all camera settings

except the date and time ( 17) and monitor

brightness ( 215) to the camera memory card.

Saved settings can be restored by selecting Load

settings. To turn save or load settings, highlight

Save/load settings in the setup menu ( 213)

and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down

to highlight an option and press the multi selector right to select. Note that

this option is unavailable when no memory card is inserted in the camera.

The Load settings option will be unavailable if the current memory card

does not contain saved settings.

Firmware Version

To display the current camera ﬁrmware version,

highlight Firmware version in the setup menu

(

213) and press the multi selector to the right.

Press the multi selector to the left to return to the

setup menu.

Saved Settings

Settings are saved to a ﬁle named “NCSETUP0” on the camera memory card. Deleting

or modifying this ﬁle will prevent the camera from loading the saved settings.

232

Connections

Connecting to External Devices

Photographs and camera menus can be displayed

on a television screen or recorded to video tape.

If the supplied software is installed, the camera

can be connected to a computer and photo-

graphs copied to disk for editing, viewing, print-

ing, or long-term storage. When the camera is

connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer,

pictures can be printed directly from the camera.

Television Playback

Read this section for information on connecting

the camera to a television or VCR.

Connecting to a Computer

This section describes how to connect the camera

to a computer.

Connecting to a Printer

Read this section for information on connecting

the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer.

233

Television Playback

Connecting the Camera to a Video Device

The supplied EG-D2 audio/video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the

D2Xs to a television or VCR for playback or recording.

Turn the camera off.

The EG-D2

Turn the camera off before connecting or dis-

connecting the EG-D2.

Open the cover protecting the A/V-out and

DC-in connectors.

A/V out

DC in

Connect the EG-D2. Insert the black plug to the camera A/V-out connec-

tor. Connect the yellow plug to the video-in jack on the television or VCR

and the white plug to the audio-in jack.

Connect to

video device

Connect to

camera

Tune the television to the video channel.

Turn the camera on. During playback, images will be displayed on the

television screen or recorded to video tape; the camera monitor will re-

main off. Note that the television may not be able to display the entire

image when pictures are played back.

Use an AC Adapter

Use of an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for extended play-

back. When the EH-6 is connected, the camera monitor-off delay will be ﬁxed at ten

minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically.

Video Mode ( 216)

Be sure that the video standard matches the standard used in the video device. Note

that resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL device.

Audio Output ( 153)

Set Via VIDEO OUT to play back or record voice memos on the video device.

234

Connecting to a Computer

Data Transfer and Camera Control

The supplied UC-E4 USB cable can be used to connect the camera to a com-

puter. Once the camera is connected, PictureProject can be used to copy

photographs to the computer, where they can be browsed, viewed, and

retouched. The camera can also be used with other applications available

separately from Nikon, including Capture NX, which supports batch process-

ing and more advanced image editing options, and Camera Control Pro,

which can be used to control the camera directly from the computer.

Before Connecting the Camera

Install the necessary software after reading the manuals and reviewing the

system requirements. To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure

the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use

or use an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately).

Before connecting the camera, set the USB option

in the setup menu ( 220) according to the com-

puter operating system and the software used:

Operating system

PictureProject

Camera Control Pro

Windows XP Home Edition

Windows XP Professional

Choose PTP or

Mass Storage

Choose PTP

Mac OS X^*

Windows 2000 Professional

Choose

Windows Millennium Edition (Me)

Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)

Mass Storage^†

Not supported

*Mac OS X version 10.3.9 or later required for Camera Control Pro.

†Do NOT select PTP. If PTP is selected when the camera is connected, the Windows

hardware wizard will be displayed. Click Cancel to exit the wizard, and then discon-

nect the camera. Be sure to select Mass storage before reconnecting the camera.

The USB Cable Clip

To prevent cable from being disconnected, fasten the clip as shown.

235

Connecting the USB Cable

Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.

Turn the camera off.

Connect the UC-E4 USB cable as shown. Connect the camera directly to

the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard.

Turn the camera on. If Mass Storage is se-

lected for USB, will be displayed in the rear

control panel and viewﬁnder. The aperture

display in the top control panel will also show

, and the PC mode indicator will ﬂash (if

PTP is selected, the camera displays will only

change when Camera Control Pro is running).

Photographs can be transferred to the com-

puter as described in the PictureProject Refer-

ence Manual (on CD).

If Camera Control Pro is running, the top con-

trol panel will show

in place of the number

of exposures remaining. Any photographs

taken will be recorded to the computer hard

disk rather than the camera memory card. See the Camera Control Pro

User’s Manual for more information.

Do Not Turn the Camera Off

Do not turn the camera off while transfer is in progress.

236

Disconnecting the Camera

If PTP is selected for USB ( 220), the camera can be turned off and the

USB cable disconnected once transfer is complete. If the USB option in the

camera setup menu is still at its default setting of Mass Storage, the camera

must ﬁrst be removed from the system as described below.

Windows XP Home Edition/Windows XP Professional

Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon ( ) in

the taskbar and select Safely remove USB Mass

Storage Device from the menu that appears.

Windows 2000 Professional

Click the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon ( ) in

the taskbar and select Stop USB Mass Storage

Device from the menu that appears.

Windows Millennium Edition (Me)

Click the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon ( ) in

the taskbar and select Stop USB Disk from the

menu that appears.

Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)

In My Computer, click with the right mouse but-

ton on the removable disk corresponding to the

camera and select Eject from the menu that ap-

pears.

Macintosh

Drag the camera volume (“NIKON D2XS”) into

the Trash.

237

Connecting to a Printer

Printing Photographs

When the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer via the

supplied UC-E4 USB cable, selected JPEG images can be printed directly

from the camera. Before connecting the printer, conﬁrm that it supports

PictBridge. If possible, connect the camera to an EH-6 AC adapter (available

separately) to reduce the drain on the battery.

Set the USB option in the setup menu (

220) to PTP (photographs can not be printed

at the default setting of Mass Storage).

Turn the printer on.

Turn the camera off.

Connect the UC-E4 USB cable as shown. Connect the camera directly to

the printer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub.

The USB Cable Clip

To prevent cable from being disconnected, fasten the clip as shown.

Taking Pictures for Direct Printing

When taking photographs to be printed without modiﬁcation, set Color space to

sRGB ( 70).

238

Turn the camera on. A welcome screen will

be displayed in the monitor, followed by a

PictBridge menu.

Press the multi selector up or down to high-

light Setup and press the multi selector to

the right. The menu shown at right will be

displayed; press the multi selector up or down

to highlight an option, then press the multi

selector to the right to make the selection.

Option

Description

Done

Save changes and return to PictBridge menu.

Choose page size. Press multi selector

up or down to highlight

(default size

for current printer), 3.5"x5", 5"x7",

Hagaki, 100mmx150mm, 4"x6", 8"x

10", Letter, A3, or A4, then press to right

to select.

Page size

Imprint date Check to print date of recording on each picture.

Check to print pictures without white border (some printers will

ignore this option).

No border

To select photographs for printing or create an index print of all JPEG

images on the memory card, highlight Print in the PictBridge menu and

press the multi selector to the right ( 240–241). To print the print or-

der created with the playback Print set option ( 163), highlight Print

(DPOF) and press the multi selector to the right ( 242).

Using the Multi Selector

The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector

lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.

239

Printing Selected Photographs

To print selected photos, highlight Print in the PictBridge menu and press the

multi selector to the right. The menu shown in Step 1 will be displayed.

Highlight Choose folder.

Display list of folders.

Highlight folder.^*

Return to print menu.

*To display photos in all folders, highlight All. To make selection from one folder only,

highlight folder name.

Highlight Print select.^†

†To create index print listing all JPEG images in current folder as small thumbnail im-

ages, highlight Index print and press multi selector to right (do not select for

Display photos in current folder.

Page size when creating index prints). Photos in current folder will be displayed,

with JPEG images marked by icon. Press to begin printing. To interrupt printing

and exit to PictBridge menu, press button again.

Selecting Photographs for Printing

NEF (RAW) and TIFF (RGB) images are not displayed in the Print select menu and can

not be selected.

240

Scroll through photos. Current photo

shown at bottom of display.

Select photo and set number of prints

to 1. Selected photos are marked by

icon. Press

button and press multi

selector up or down to specify number

of prints (up to 99).^‡

‡

If printer supports cropping, photo can be cropped

for printing by pressing button. Dialog shown at

right will be displayed; rotate main command dial to

zoom in or out and use multi selector to scroll to other

areas of image (note that prints may become slightly

“grainy” when highly enlarged). When desired area is

framed in monitor, press

button to return to print

selection dialog. Only selected portion of photo will

be included when image is printed.

Repeat steps 7 and 8 to select additional pictures. To deselect picture,

highlight and press center of multi selector. To exit to PictBridge menu

without printing, press button.

Begin printing. To cancel and return

to PictBridge menu before all images

have been printed, press

button

again. Turn camera off and disconnect

USB cable when printing is complete.

Print Times

Larger images require more time to print.

241

Printing the Current Print Order

To print the current print order, highlight Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge

menu and press the multi selector to the right.

View photos in current folder. Pictures

in print order are indicated by

icon

and number of prints; print order can

be changed as described on page 164.

To exit to PictBridge menu without

printing, press button.

Begin printing. To cancel and return

to PictBridge menu before all images

have been printed, press

again. Turn camera off and disconnect

USB cable when printing is complete.

button

“Data Imprint”/“Imprint Date”

Selecting Print (DPOF) resets the Data imprint and Imprint date options for the

current print order ( 164). To print the date of recording on photographs, select

Imprint date in the PictBridge Setup menu.

Error Messages

If the dialog shown at right is displayed, an error has

occurred. After checking the printer and resolving any

problems as directed in the printer manual, press the

multi selector up or down to highlight Continue and

press the multi selector to the right to resume printing.

Select Cancel to exit without printing the remaining

images.

Print Set ( 163)

To create a DPOF print order before printing, use the Print set option in the playback

menu.

242

Technical

Notes

Camera Care, Options, and Resources

This chapter covers the following topics:

Optional Accessories

A list of the lenses and other accessories available

for the D2Xs. See the latest Nikon catalogs and

websites for additional information.

Caring for the Camera

Information on storage and maintenance.

Troubleshooting

A list of the error messages displayed by your

camera and how to deal with them.

Speciﬁcations

Principal speciﬁcations for the D2Xs.

243

Optional Accessories

Lenses and Other Accessories

Lenses for the D2Xs

The D2Xs is compatible with a variety of AF Nikkor lenses for 35-mm ﬁlm

cameras, including wide-angle, telephoto, zoom, micro, defocus image con-

trol (DC), and regular lenses with focal lengths of 14–600mm ( 246). Note

that IX Nikkor CPU lenses can not be used with the D2Xs.

The lenses that can be used with the D2Xs are listed below.

Camera setting

Focus

mode

Exposure

mode

Metering

system

M (with

electronic

range ﬁnder)

Lens/accessory

Type G or D AF Nikkor²

3D Color

✔

—

✔

AF-S, AF-I Nikkor

PC-Micro Nikkor 85mm f/2.8D⁴

AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter⁷

—

✔

Other AF Nikkor (except lenses

for F3AF)

✔

—

✔

AI-P Nikkor

AI-,AI-S, or Series E Nikkor¹²

AI modiﬁed Nikkor

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

Medical Nikkor 120mm f/4

Reﬂex Nikkor

—

✔

—

PC-Nikkor

AI-type Teleconverter ¹⁸

✔

TC-16A AF Teleconverter

✔

PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attach-

ment¹⁹

—

✔

—

✔

—

✔

Auto extension rings (PK-series

11A, 12, or 13; PN-11)

✔

—

✔

1 IX-Nikkor lenses can not be used.

2 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.

3 Spot metering meters selected focus area.

4 The camera’s exposure metering and ﬂash control systems do not

work properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an

aperture other than the maximum aperture is used.

5 Electronic range ﬁnder can not be used with shifting or tilting.

6 Manual exposure mode only.

7 See teleconverter manual for list of compatible lenses.

8 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.

When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm

f/2.8S, AF 35–70mm f/2.8S, new AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5S, or AF

244

28–85mm f/3.5–4.5S lens at maximum zoom, in-focus indicator

may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewﬁnder is not in

focus. Adjust focus manually until image in viewﬁnder is in focus.

10 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.

than 1/125s. If maximum aperture is speciﬁed using Non-CPU

lens data option in shooting menu, aperture value will be displayed

in viewﬁnder and top control panel.

17 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-prior-

ity auto exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring be-

fore performing AE lock or shifting lens. In manual exposure mode,

preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure

before shifting lens.

11 Some lenses can not be used (see below).

12 Range of rotation for Ai 80–200mm f/2.8S ED tripod mount limited

by camera body. Filters can not be exchanged whileAi 200–400mm

f/4S ED is mounted on camera.

13 If maximum aperture is speciﬁed using Non-CPU lens data option

in shooting menu, aperture value will be displayed in viewﬁnder and

top control panel.

14 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are

speciﬁed using Non-CPU lens data option in shooting menu. Use

spot or center-weighted metering if desired results are not achieved.

15 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum

aperture using Non-CPU lens data option in shooting menu.

16 Can be used at in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower

18 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm

f/3.5–4.5S, AI 35–105mm f/3.5–4.5S, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5S,

or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D. See teleconverter manual for details.

19 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be

required depending on camera orientation.

20 Use preset aperture. In manual exposure mode, set aperture us-

ing focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking

photograph.

•

PF-4 Reprocopy Outﬁt requires PA-4 Camera Holder.

Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses

The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D2Xs:

• Non-AI lenses

• Lenses for the F3AF (80mm f/2.8,

• Lenses that require the AU-1 focus- 200mm f/3.5, TC-16 Teleconverter)

ing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, • PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or

800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)

• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm • PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–

earlier)

f/5.6)

906200)

• 21mm f/4 (old type)

• K2 rings

• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)

• 1000mm f/6.3 Reﬂex (old type)

• ED 180–600mm f/8 (serial numbers • 1000mm f/11 Reﬂex (serial numbers

174041–174180) 142361–143000)

• ED 360–1200mm f/11 (serial numbers • 2000mm f/11 Reﬂex (serial numbers

174031–174127)

200111–200310)

• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers

280001–300490)

Compatible Non-CPU Lenses

If lens data are speciﬁed using the Non-CPU lens data option in the shooting menu,

many of the features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non-CPU lenses.

If lens data are not speciﬁed, color matrix metering can not be used, and center-

weighted metering is used when matrix metering is selected.

Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes A and M, when aperture must be

set using the lens aperture ring. If the maximum aperture has not been speciﬁed using

Non-CPU lens data, the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from

maximum aperture; the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring.

Aperture-priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure modes P and S. The

exposure-mode indicator in the top control panel will blink, and A will be displayed in

the viewﬁnder.

245

CPU lenses can be identiﬁed by the presence of CPU contacts. Type G lenses

are marked with a “G” on the lens barrel, type D lenses with a “D.”

CPU lens

Type G lens

Type D lens

Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring. Unlike other CPU

lenses, there is no need to lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture

setting (maximum f/-number) when using a type G lens.

Picture Angle and Focal Length

The diagonal picture angle of the D2Xs is less than that of a 35-mm cam-

era. When calculating the focal length of the lenses for the D2Xs in 35-mm

format, multiply the focal length of the lens by about 1.5 (high-speed crop

mode off) or 2 (high-speed crop mode on):

Approximate focal length (mm) in 35-mm format

Picture angle

(modiﬁed for picture angle)

35-mm ﬁlm camera

52.5

Hi-speed crop: Off 25.5

90 127.5

120 170

D2Xs

Hi-speed crop: On 34

100

35-mm ﬁlm camera

105 135 180 200 300 400

500 600

750 900

Hi-speed crop: Off 157.5 202.5 270 300 450 600

D2Xs

Hi-speed crop: On 210 170 360 400 600 800 1000 1200

Calculating Picture Angle

Picture size (35-mm format)

The size of the area exposed by a 35-mm cam-

era is 36×24mm. The size of the area exposed

by the D2Xs, in contrast, is 23.7×15.7mm

(high-speed crop off) or 17.7×11.7mm (high-

speed crop on). As a result, the picture angle

of photographs taken with the D2Xs differs

from the picture angle for 35-mm cameras,

even when the focal length of the lens and the

distance to the subject are the same.

(36 mm × 24 mm)

Picture diagonal

Lens

Picture size

(D2Xs; high-speed crop off)

(23.7 mm × 15.7 mm)

Picture size

(D2Xs; high-speed crop on)

(17.7 mm × 11.7 mm)

Picture angle (35-mm format)

Picture angle

(D2Xs; high-speed crop off)

Picture angle

(D2Xs; high-speed crop on)

246

Other Accessories for the D2Xs

At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the

D2Xs.

Batteries/

Chargers/

AC adapters

♦EN-EL4a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery: Additional EN-EL4a batteries

are available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives.

♦MH-21 Quick Charger: The MH-21 can be used to recharge and cali-

brate EN-EL4a and EN-EL4 batteries.

♦EH-6 AC Adapter: The EH-6 can be used with AC power sources of

50–60Hz and 100–120V or 200–240V. Separate power cables are

available for use in North America, the United Kingdom, continental

Europe, Australia, and Japan.

Wireless

LAN

adapters

and

♦WT-2/2A and WT-1/1A Wireless Transmitters: These wireless transmit-

ters are mounted on the bottom of the camera and connect via a USB

cable. Power is supplied from the camera. The WT-2/2A supports

IEEE 802.11g for high-speed wireless transmission, and can be used

in combination with Camera Control Pro (available separately) to

control the camera remotely. Both models support IEEE 802.11b and

can be used to upload photographs to an ftp server over a wireless

network. See pages 223–231 for more information.

antennas

♦WA-E1 Extended RangeAntenna: Extends line-of-sight range of WT-2/2A

and WT-1/1A to a maximum of about 150m (outdoors, 1Mbps)

Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories

Your Nikon D2Xs digital camera is designed to the highest standards and includes

complex electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery

chargers, batteries, and AC adapters) certiﬁed by Nikon speciﬁcally for use with your

Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and

safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.

THE USE OF NON-NIKON ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR

NIKON WARRANTY. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not approved by

Nikon could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries

overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.

For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact your local authorized

Nikon dealer.

247

Viewﬁnder

eyepiece

♦Focusing Screens: The focusing screens available for the D2Xs are

listed below. Type B and E screens can also be used with the D2H.

accessories

Type B

III

A type B BriteView III focusing screen

is supplied with the camera.

The type E clear-matte III focusing

screen is etched with a grid, making

it suitable for copying and architec-

tural photography. Best results are

achieved with PC-Nikkor lenses.

Type E

III

♦DG-2 Magniﬁer: The DG-2 magniﬁes the scene displayed in the view-

ﬁnder. Use for close-up photography, copying, telephoto lenses, and

other tasks that call for added precision. DK-18 eyepiece adapter

(available separately) required.

♦DK-14 and DK-17A Antifog Finder Eyepieces: These viewﬁnder eye-

pieces prevent fogging in humid or cold conditions. The DK-17A is

equipped with a safety lock.

♦DK-19 Rubber Eyepiece Cup: The DK-19 makes the image in the view-

ﬁnder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.

♦Diopter-Adjustment Viewﬁnder Lenses: To accommodate individual

differences in vision, viewﬁnder lenses are available with diopters

of –3, –2, 0, +1, and +2m^–1. The DK-17C is equipped with a safety

lock.

♦DK-17M Magnifying Eyepiece: The DK-17M magniﬁes the view

through the viewﬁnder by 1.2× for greater precision when framing.

♦DR-5 Right-Angle Magnifying Viewing Attachment/DR-4 Right-Angle

Viewing Attachment: The DR-4 and DR-5 attach to the viewﬁnder

eyepiece at a right angle, allowing the image in the viewﬁnder to be

viewed from above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting

position. The DR-5 can also magnify the view through the viewﬁnder

by 2× for greater precision when framing (note that the edges of the

frame will not be visible when the view is magniﬁed).

♦DK-18 Eyepiece Adapter: The DK-18 is used when attaching the DG-2

Magniﬁer or DR-3 Right-Angle Viewing Attachment to the D2Xs.

248

Filters

•

Nikon ﬁlters can be divided into three types: screw-in, slip-in, and rear-

interchange. Use Nikon ﬁlters; ﬁlters manufactured by other makers

may interfere with autofocus or electronic range ﬁnding.

• The D2Xs can not be used with linear polarizing ﬁlters. Use the C-PL

circular polarizing ﬁlter instead.

• The NC and L37C ﬁlters are recommended for protecting the lens.

•

When using an R60 ﬁlter, set exposure compensation to +1.

• To prevent moiré, use of a ﬁlter is not recommended when the sub-

ject is framed against a bright light, or when a bright light source is

in the frame.

• Color matrix and 3D color matrix metering may not produce the de-

sired results when used with ﬁlters with an exposure factor (ﬁlter fac-

tor) over 1× (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4S,

ND4, ND8S, ND8, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). We recommend

center-weighted metering. For details, see the manual provided with

the ﬁlter.

Optional

Speedlights

♦SB-800: This high performance Speedlight has a Guide Number of

38/125 (m/ft, 35-mm zoom head position, ISO 100) and supports

i-TTL, TTL, auto aperture (AA), non-TTL auto (A), manual, and repeat-

ing ﬂash control. Flash sync mode, including slow and rear-curtain

sync, can be set from the camera. When used with the D2Xs, the

SB-800 supports Auto FP High-Speed Sync for sync speeds faster

than ½50 s (repeating ﬂash mode excluded), Flash Color Information

Communication for optimal white balance, FV Lock for recomposing

photos without changing ﬂash level, and Advanced Wireless Lighting

with support for i-TTL, auto aperture, manual, and repeating ﬂash

control. The built-in AF-assist illuminator can be used with all of the

D2Xs’s eleven focus areas. For bounce-ﬂash or close-up photogra-

phy, the ﬂash head can be rotated through 90° above and 7° below

the horizontal, 180° left, and 90° right, while soft lighting can be

achieved with the supplied SW-10H bounce adapter. Auto power

zoom (24–105mm) ensures that the illuminating is adjusted in ac-

cord with lens focal length. The built-in wide panel can be used for

illuminating angles of 14mm and 17mm. An illuminator is included

to assist in adjusting settings in the dark. The SB-800 accepts four

AA batteries (ﬁve AA batteries when powered by the supplied SD-

800 battery pack) or SD-6, SD-7, or SD-8A power sources (available

separately; see the Speedlight manual for details). Custom settings

are available for ﬁne-tuning all aspects of ﬂash operation.

249

Optional

Speedlights

(continued)

♦SB-600: This high performance Speedlight has a Guide Number of

30/98 (m/ft, 35-mm zoom head position, ISO 100) and supports i-

TTL, TTL, and manual ﬂash control. Flash sync mode, including slow

and rear-curtain sync, can be set from the camera. When used with

the D2Xs, the SB-600 supports Auto FP High-Speed Sync for sync

speeds faster than ½50 s, Flash Color Information Communication for

optimal white balance, and FV Lock for recomposing photos without

changing ﬂash level. With an SB-800 Speedlight or SU-800 wireless

Speedlight commander acting as a master ﬂash, Advanced Wireless

Lighting allows the SB-600 to serve as a remote slave ﬂash in i-TTL

and manual ﬂash control modes. The built-in AF-assist illuminator

can be used with all of the D2Xs’s eleven focus areas. For bounce-

ﬂash or close-up photography, the ﬂash head can be rotated through

90° above the horizontal, 180° left, and 90° right. Auto power

zoom (24–85mm) ensures that the illuminating is adjusted in accord

with lens focal length. The built-in wide panel can be used for an

illuminating angle of 14mm. An illuminator is included to assist in

adjusting settings in the dark. The SB-600 accepts four AA batteries

(see the Speedlight manual for details). Custom settings are available

for ﬁne-tuning all aspects of ﬂash operation.

♦SB-R200: This high-performance wireless remote Speedlight has a

Guide Number of 10/32 (m/ft, ISO 100, 20°C/68°F). Although it

cannot be mounted on the camera accessory shoe, the SB-R200 can

be ﬁred remotely using an optional SB-800 Speedlight or SU-800

wireless Speedlight commander. It can held by hand, placed on an

AS-20 Speedlight stand, or mounted on the camera lens using the

SX-1 attachment for remote control and close-up i-TTL photography.

When using the D2Xs with the above Speedlights, refer to the listing

for CLS- (Creative Lighting System) compatible or digital SLR cameras

in the Speedlight manual.

PC card

♦EC-AD1 PC Card Adapter: The EC-AD1 PC card adapter allows Type I

adapters

CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in PCMCIA card slots.

Software

♦Capture NX: A complete photo editing package.

♦Camera Control Pro: Control the camera remotely from a computer

and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk.

♦Image Authentication: Determine whether photographs taken with

image authentication on have been modiﬁed after shooting.

250

Remote

The D2Xs is equipped with a ten-pin remote

terminal terminal for remote control and automatic

accessories photography. The terminal is provided with

a cap, which protects the contacts when the

terminal is not in use. The following acces-

sories can be used:

Accessory

Description

Length^*

MC-21

Extension Cord

(9´10˝)

Can be connected to MC-series 20, 22, 23, 25, or 30.

Remote shutter release with blue, yellow, and black termi-

nals for connection to a remote shutter-triggering device,

allowing control via sound or electronic signals.

MC-22

Remote Cord

(3´3˝)

MC-23

Connecting

Cord

40cm

(1´4˝)

Connects two cameras for simultaneous operation.

Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cord for connection to devices

with two-pin terminals, including the MW-2 radio control

set, MT-2 intervalometer, and ML-2 modulite control set.

MC-25

Adapter Cord

20cm

(8˝)

MC-30

Remote shutter release; can be used to reduce camera 80cm

Remote Cord shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure.

(2´7˝)

MC-35 GPS Connects GPS devices to D2Xs via PC cable supplied by

Adapter Cord manufacturer of GPS device ( 135).

—

Remote shutter release; can be used for interval timer

photography or to reduce camera shake or keep the shut-

ter open during a time exposure. Equipped with back-lit

MC-36

Remote Cord

85 cm

(2´9˝)

control panel, shutter-release lock for use in bulb photog-

raphy, and timer that beeps at one-second intervals.

ML-3 Modulite

Allows infrared remote control at ranges of up to 8m

Remote

Control Set

—

(26´).

All ﬁgures are approximate.

251

Approved Memory Cards

The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the D2Xs:

SDCFB

SDCFB (Type II)

128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB, 4GB

300MB

SanDisk

SDCF2B (Type II)

256MB

SDCFH (Ultra II)

256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB, 4GB, 8GB

1GB, 2GB, 4GB

SDCFX (Extreme III)

Entry-level CompactFlash cards

128MB, 256MB, 512MB

High speed 40× with Write Acceleration

(WA)

256MB, 512MB, 1GB

Lexar

Media

Professional 40× with WA

Professional 80× with WA

8GB

512MB, 1GB, 2GB, 4GB

Professional 80× with WA and LockTight

technology

512MB, 2GB

Microdrive

1GB, 2GB, 4GB, 6GB

Operation is not guaranteed with other makes of card. For more details on

the above cards, please contact the manufacturer.

Memory Cards

• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory

cards from the camera.

• Format memory cards before ﬁrst use or after data have been written to or deleted

from the card by a device other than the camera.

• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove

memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the

power source during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied

to a computer. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in

damage to the camera or card.

• Do not touch the card terminals with your ﬁngers or metal objects.

• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could dam-

age the card.

• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.

• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.

252

Caring for the Camera

Storage and Maintenance

Storage

When the camera will not be used for an extended period, replace the mon-

itor cover, remove the battery, and store the battery in a cool, dry area with

the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a

dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor

moth balls or in locations that:

• are poorly ventilated or damp

• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic ﬁelds, such as

televisions or radios

• are exposed to temperatures above 50°C/122°F (for example, near a

space heater or in a closed vehicle on a hot day) or below –10°C (14°F)

• are subject to humidities of over 60%

See “Caring for the Camera and Battery” ( iv–v) for more information.

Cleaning

Use a blower to remove dust, dirt, or sand then wipe gently with a soft, dry

cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or

salt with a dry cloth lightly dampened with fresh water, then dry thoroughly.

Camera

body

The camera may be damaged if foreign matter gets inside the camera body.

Nikon cannot accept liability for damage caused by dirt or sand.

These elements are made of glass and are easily damaged. Remove

dust and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can

vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove ﬁngerprints and

other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and

clean with care.

Lens,

mirror, and

viewﬁnder

Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing ﬁngerprints and

other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather.

Do not apply pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction.

Monitor

Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry

cloth. Do not use alcohol or lens cleaning solutions.

Ambient

light sensor

The Monitor

Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury caused by broken glass

and to prevent liquid crystal from entering your eyes and mouth.

The Control Panel

Rarely, static electricity may cause the control panel to brighten or darken. This does

not indicate a malfunction; the display will shortly return to normal.

253

Replacing the Focusing Screen

A type B BriteView III focusing screen is inserted in the camera at shipment.

To insert an optional type E clear-matte III focusing screen ( 248):

Turn the camera off and remove the lens.

Using the tweezers supplied with the focusing

screen, pull the focusing screen latch towards

you. The screen holder will spring open.

Remove the existing screen, using the sup-

plied tweezers and being careful to handle the

screen by the tab to avoid scratches.

Using the tweezers and handling the screen

by the tab, set the replacement screen in the

holder.

Push the front edge of holder upward until it

clicks into place.

Replacing Focusing Screens

Do not touch the surface of the mirror or focusing screens.

Focusing Screens

Use only screens designated for use in the D2Xs.

Framing Grids

The display in type E focusing screens may be slightly out of position depending on

how the focusing screen is placed.

254

Replacing the Clock Battery

The camera clock is powered by a CR1616 lithium battery with a life of about

four years. If the

exposure meters are on, the battery is running low and needs to be replaced.

When the battery is exhausted, the icon will blink while the exposure

icon is displayed in the top control panel while the

meters are on. Photographs can still be taken but will not be stamped with

the correct time and date, and interval timer photography will not function

correctly. Replace the battery as described below.

The clock battery chamber is located on the roof of the main battery

chamber. Turn the camera off and remove the EN-EL4a battery.

Slide the clock battery chamber cover toward

the front of the main battery chamber.

CR 1616

Remove the clock battery.

Insert new CR1616 lithium battery so that the

positive side (the side marked with “+” and

CR 1616

the battery name) is visible.

Slide the clock battery chamber cover towards

CR 1616

the back of the main battery chamber until it

clicks into place.

Reinsert the EN-EL4a.

Set the camera to the current date and time.

Until the date and time have been set, the

icon will ﬂash in the top control panel.

CAUTION

Use only CR1616 lithium batteries. Using another type of battery could cause an ex-

plosion. Dispose of used batteries as directed.

Inserting the Clock Battery

Insert the clock battery in the correct orientation. Inserting the battery incorrectly

could not only prevent the clock from functioning but could damage the camera.

255

The Low-Pass Filter

The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is ﬁtted with a

low-pass ﬁlter to prevent moiré. Although this ﬁlter prevents foreign objects

from adhering directly to the image sensor, under certain conditions dirt or

dust on the ﬁlter may appear in photographs. If you suspect that dirt or dust

inside the camera is affecting your photographs, you can check for the pres-

ence of foreign objects on the low-pass ﬁlter as described below.

Turn the camera off and connect an EH-6 AC adapter (available sepa-

rately). If you do not have access to an EH-6 AC adapter, use a fully-

charge EN-EL4a or EN-EL4 battery.

Remove the lens and turn the camera on.

Press the button and select Mirror lock-up

from the setup menu ( 213; note that this

option is only available if an EH-6 adapter is

used or the battery is fully charged). The mes-

sage shown at right will be displayed.

Press the multi selector to the right. The mes-

sage shown at right will be displayed in the

camera monitor, and a row of dashes will be

displayed in the control panel and viewﬁnder.

To return to normal operation without raising

the mirror, turn the camera off. Mirror lock-

up will also be cancelled if the monitor is al-

lowed to turn off automatically.

Press the shutter-release button all the way

down. The mirror will be raised and the shut-

ter curtain will open, revealing the low-pass

ﬁlter, and the row of dashes in the control

panel will blink. The displays in the viewﬁnder

and rear control panel will turn off.

256

Holding the camera so that light falls on the

low-pass ﬁlter, examine the ﬁlter for dust or

lint. If there are foreign objects on the ﬁlter,

the ﬁlter requires cleaning. See the following

section.

Turn the camera off. The mirror will return to the down position and the

shutter curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap and disconnect

the AC adapter.

Cleaning the Low-Pass Filter

The low-pass ﬁlter is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon recom-

mends that ﬁlter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized service personnel.

Should you choose to clean the ﬁlter yourself, follow the steps below.

Raise the mirror as described in steps 1–5 on the preceding page. Do not

remove or disconnect the power source until cleaning is complete.

Remove dust and lint from the ﬁlter with a

blower. Do not use a blower-brush, as the

bristles could damage the ﬁlter. Dirt that can

not be removed with a blower can only be re-

moved by Nikon-authorized service personnel.

Under no circumstances should you touch or

wipe the ﬁlter.

Turn the camera off. The mirror will return to the down position and the

shutter curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap and disconnect

the AC adapter.

Use a Reliable Power Source

The camera shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off

while the mirror is raised, the shutter curtain will close automatically. Observe the fol-

lowing precautions to prevent damage to the curtain:

• Use a fully-charged battery or an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately) for pro-

longed inspection or cleaning of the low-pass ﬁlter.

• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mir-

ror is raised.

• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer

lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will lower in

about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.

257

Troubleshooting

Understanding Error Messages and Displays

This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the view-

ﬁnder, control panel, and monitor when there is a problem with the camera.

Consult the list below before contacting your retailer or Nikon representa-

tive.

Indicator

Control View-

panel ﬁnder

Problem

Solution

Lens aperture ring is not set to Set ring to minimum aperture

(blinks)

minimum aperture.

Low battery.

(largest f/-number).

Ready a fully-charged spare

battery.

Battery exhausted.

Replace battery.

(blinks) (blinks)

Contact Nikon-authorized ser-

vice representative.

Battery can not be used.

No lens attached, or non-

CPU lens attached without

specifying maximum aperture.

Aperture shown in stops from

maximum aperture.

Aperture value will be dis-

played if maximum aperture 133

is speciﬁed.

Camera unable to focus using

(blinks) autofocus.

Focus manually.

• Use a lower ISO sensitivity

• Use optional ND ﬁlter

• In exposure mode:

S Increase shutter speed

A Choose a smaller aperture

(larger f/-number)

249

Subject too bright; photo will

be overexposed.

• Use a higher ISO sensitivity

• Use optional Speedlight

• In exposure mode:

S Lower shutter speed

A Choose a larger aperture

(smaller f/-number)

108

Subject too dark; photo will be

underexposed.

258

Indicator

Control View-

panel ﬁnder

Problem

Solution

selected in shutter-pri- Change shutter speed or se-

90,

(blinks)

ority auto.

lect manual exposure mode.

Speedlight that does not

support D-TTL ﬂash control

attached and set to TTL.

Change ﬂash mode setting on

optional Speedlight.

111

Speedlight that does not

support red-eye reduction at-

tached and ﬂash sync mode

set to red-eye reduction.

Change ﬂash sync mode or

use Speedlight that supports

red-eye reduction.

111–

112

(blinks)

If indicator blinks for 3s after Check photo in monitor; if

ﬂash ﬁres, photo may be un- underexposed, adjust settings

116

(blinks)

derexposed.

and try again.

Release shutter. If error per-

sists or appears frequently,

consult with Nikon-authorized

service representative.

Camera malfunction.

Memory insufﬁcient to record

further photos at current set-

tings, or camera has run out of

ﬁle or folder numbers.

• Reduce quality or size.

• Delete photographs.

• Insert new memory card.

156

(blinks)

Indicator

Control

panel

Monitor

Problem

Solution

Turn camera off and con-

ﬁrm that card is correctly

inserted.

NO CARD

PRESENT

Camera cannot detect

memory card.

CARD IS NOT

FORMATTED

Memory card has not been

formatted for use in D2Xs.

23,

214

Format memory card.

No images on memory Select folder containing im-

card or folder(s) selected ages from Playback folder

for playback contain no menu or insert different

FOLDER

CONTAINS

NO IMAGES

22,

158

images.

memory card.

259

Indicator

Control

Monitor

panel

Problem

Solution

• Error accessing memory • Use Nikon-approved card. 252

card.

• Check that contacts are

clean. If card is damaged,

contact retailer or Nikon

representative.

THIS CARD

CANNOT BE

USED

(blinks)

• Unable to create new • Delete ﬁles or insert new 22,

folder.

memory card.

156

23,

• Card has not been for- • Format memory card.

matted for use in D2Xs.

214

No images can be played

back until another folder

has been selected or Hide

image used to allow at

least one image to be dis-

played.

ALL IMAGES

HIDDEN

All photos in current folder

are hidden.

158,

161

FILE DOES

NOT

CONTAIN

IMAGE DATA

File has been created or

modiﬁed using a computer

or different make of cam-

era, or ﬁle is corrupt.

23,

156,

214

Delete ﬁle or reformat

memory card.

NO IMAGES

AVAILABLE

FORTRIMMING

Memory card does not Insert memory card contain-

contain images that can be ing RAW or JPEG images

123

cropped.

taken with D2Xs.

A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras

In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear in the control panel and

the camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a

strong external static charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery,

and turn the camera on again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (available separately),

disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again. In the event

of continued malfunction, contact your retailer or Nikon representative. Note that

disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not

recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred. Data already recorded

to the card will not be affected.

260

Speciﬁcations

Type

Single-lens reﬂex digital camera with interchangeable lenses

Effective pixels

12.4 million

Image sensor

23.7×15.7 mm; total pixels: 12.84 million

Image size (pixels)

High-speed crop on

4288×2848 (L), 3216×2136 (M), 2144×1424 (S)

3216×2136 (L), 2400×1600 (M), 1600×1064 (S)

Lens mount

Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)

Compatible lenses^*

Type G or D AF Nikkor All functions supported

Micro Nikkor 85mm

F2.8D

All functions supported except autofocus and some exposure

modes

Other AF Nikkor^†

All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II

and 3D multi-sensor balanced ﬁll-ﬂash for digital SLR

All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II, 3D

multi-sensor balanced ﬁll-ﬂash for digital SLR, and autofocus

Can be used in exposure modes A and M; electronic range

ﬁnder can be used if maximum aperture is f/5.6 or faster;

color matrix metering, multi-sensor balanced ﬁll-ﬂash for digi-

tal SLR, and aperture value display supported if user provides

lens data

AI-P Nikkor

Non-CPU

IX Nikkor lenses can not be used

†

Excluding lenses for F3AF

Picture angle

Equivalent in 35-mm format is approximately 1.5 times lens

focal length (2 times when high-speed crop is on)

Viewﬁnder

Diopter adjustment

Eyepoint

Optical ﬁxed eye-level pentaprism

–3–+1m^–1

19.9mm (–1.0m^–1)

Focusing screen

Frame coverage

High-speed crop on

Magniﬁcation

Ships with type B BriteView III screen installed

Approximately 100% of lens (vertical and horizontal)

Approximately 97% of lens (vertical and horizontal)

Approximately 0.86× (50-mm lens at inﬁnity; –1.0m^–1)

Reﬂex mirror

Quick return

Lens aperture

Instant return with depth-of-ﬁeld preview

Focus-area selection

Single area or group can be selected from 11 focus areas (9

focus areas when high-speed crop is on)

Lens servo

Instant single-servo AF (S); continuous-servo AF (C); manual

(M); predictive focus tracking automatically activated accord-

ing to subject status in single- and continuous-servo AF

261

Autofocus

TTL phase detection by Nikon Multi-CAM2000 autofocus

module

Detection range

–1–+19EV (0–+19EV for two focus areas outside high-

(ISO 100 at 20°C/68°F) speed crop)

AF-area mode

Single-area AF, dynamic-area AF, group dynamic-AF, dynamic-

area AF with closest subject priority

Focus lock

Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button half-

way (single-servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button

Exposure

Metering

Matrix

TTL exposure metering using 1,005-pixel RGB sensor

3D color matrix metering II supported with type G and D lens-

es; color matrix metering II available with other CPU lenses

and with non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data

Center-weighted

Spot

Weight of 75% given to 6, 8, 10, or 13-mm circle in center of

frame, or weighting based on average of entire frame

Meters 3-mm circle (about 2% of frame) centered on selected

focus area (on center focus area when non-CPU lens is used)

Range

(ISO 100 equivalent,

f/1.4 lens, 20°C/68°F)

0–20EV (3D color matrix or center-weighted metering)

2–20EV (spot metering)

Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI

Exposure control

Exposure modes

Programmed auto with ﬂexible program; shutter-priority

auto; aperture priority auto; manual

Exposure compensation –5–+5EV in increments of ¹/3, ½, or 1EV

Bracketing

Exposure and/or ﬂash bracketing (2–9 exposures in incre-

ments of ¹/3, ½, ²/3, or 1EV)

Exposure lock

Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button

Shutter

Speed

Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter

30–¹/8000 s in steps of ¹/3, ½, or 1EV, bulb

ISO Sensitivity (Recom- 100–800 in steps of ¹/3, ½, or 1EV with additional settings of

mended Exposure Index) approximately 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, or 2 EV over ISO 800.

White balance

Auto (TTL white-balance with main image sensor, 1,005 pix-

els RGB sensor, and ambient light sensor), six manual modes

with ﬁne-tuning, color temperature setting

Bracketing

2–9 exposures in increments of 1, 2, or 3

262

Flash

Sync contact

Flash control

TTL

X-contact only; ﬂash synchronization at up to ½50 s

TTL ﬂash control by combined ﬁve-segment TTL multi sensor

with single-component IC and 1,005-pixel AE sensor

• SB-800 or 600: i-TTL balanced ﬁll-ﬂash for digital SLR and

standard i-TTL ﬂash for digital SLR

• SB-80DX, 28DX, or 50DX: 3D multi-sensor balanced-ﬁll ﬂash

for digital SLR, multi-sensor balanced-ﬁll ﬂash for digital

SLR, or standard TTL ﬂash for digital SLR

Auto aperture

Non-TTL auto

Available with SB-800, 80DX, or 28DX and CPU lens

Available with such Speedlights as SB-800, 28, 27, and 22s

Range-priority manual Available with SB-800

Sync modes Front curtain sync (normal), slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-

eye reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync

Flash-ready indicator Lights when SB-series Speedlight such as 800, 600, 80DX,

28DX, or 50DX is fully charged; blinks for 3s after ﬂash is

ﬁred at full output

Accessory shoe

Nikon Creative

Standard ISO hot-shoe contact with safety lock

With CLS-compatible ﬂash units such as SB-800, SB-600,

Lighting System (CLS) SU-800, and SB-R200, supports Advanced Wireless Lighting,

Auto FP High-Speed Sync, Flash Color Information Communi-

cation, modeling illumination, and FV lock.

Storage

Media

File system

Type I and II CompactFlash memory cards; Microdrives

Compliant with Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF)

and Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Compression

• Compressed 12-bit NEF (RAW): approximately 50–60%

• JPEG: JPEG baseline-compliant, can be selected from Size

priority and Optimal quality

Self-timer

Electronically controlled timer with 2–20s duration

Depth-of-ﬁeld preview Lens aperture stopped down when depth-of-ﬁeld preview

button is pressed

Monitor

2.5-in., 232,000-dot, low-temperature polysilicon TFT LCD

with brightness adjustment

263

Video output

External interface

Tripod socket

Firmware

Can be selected from NTSC and PAL

USB 2.0

¼˝ (ISO)

User upgradeable

Supported languages Chinese (Simpliﬁed), Dutch, English, French, German, Italian,

Japanese, Korean, Spanish, Swedish

Power source

• One 11.1V EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion battery

• EH-6 AC adapter (available separately)

Dimensions (W×H×D) Approximately 157.5×149.5×85.5mm (6.2×5.9×3.4in.)

Weight

Approximately 1070g (2lb 6oz) without battery, memory

card, body cap, or monitor cover

Operating environment

Temperature

0–40°C (32–104°F)

Humidity

Less than 85% (no condensation)

• Unless otherwise stated, all ﬁgures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery

operating at an ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F).

• Nikon reserves the right to change the speciﬁcations of the hardware and software

described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held

liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.

Servicing the Camera and Accessories

The D2Xs is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that

the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once

every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to ﬁve years (note that

fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recom-

mended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the

camera, such as lenses or optional Speedlights, should be included when the camera

is inspected or serviced.

264

Quick Charger/Rechargeable Battery

The supplied MH-21 Quick Charger is for use with Nikon EN-EL4 and EN-EL4a

rechargeable Li-ion batteries. The MH-21 is equipped with battery calibra-

tion feature and charge lamps that glow, blink, or turn off according to the

battery charge state.

Contacts

Charge lamps

Calibration lamp

Calibration button

Wall plug

Power cable

Contact protector

AC adapter plug

Calibration

Calibration allows precise measurement of battery charge, ensuring that the battery

level can be displayed more accurately.

EN-EL4a Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries

EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion batteries can transmit information on battery state when

connected to compatible devices.

265

Using the Charger

Plug the AC adapter plug into the battery

charger.

Plug the wall plug into a power outlet. The charge and calibration lights

will remain off.

Insert the battery (terminals ﬁrst), aligning the

end of the battery with the guide and then

sliding the battery in the direction indicated

until it clicks into place. Charging will begin

when the battery is inserted. The charge state

is shown by the charge lamps:

Charge lamps (green)

50% 80% 100%

Charge state

Less than 50% of maximum

capacity

Blinks Off

Off

50–80% of maximum

capacity

More than 80% but less

than 100% of maximum

capacity

Glows Blinks Off

Glows Glows Blinks

Glows Glows Glows

100% of maximum capac-

ity

When charging is complete, slide the battery out of the charger and un-

plug the charger.

When the charger is not in use, replace the contact protector to prevent dust

from accumulating on the charger contacts.

266

If the Calibration Lamp Blinks

If the calibration lamp blinks for about ten seconds after a battery is inserted,

the battery needs to be calibrated to ensure that its charge state can be ac-

curately measured. The time needed to calibrate the battery is shown by the

charge lamps:

Approximate time

needed to recalibrate lamp (yellow)

Calibration

Charge lamps (green)

battery

CAL ON

Glows

Off

Over 6 hours

Glows

Off

Glows

Off

4–6 hours

2–4 hours

Off

Under 2 hours

Off

To start calibration, press the CAL button next to the calibration lamp for

about a second while the lamp is blinking. When calibration is complete, the

calibration and charge lamps will turn off and charging will begin.

Although calibration is recommended for accurate measurement of battery

charge state, calibration need not be performed when the calibration lamp

blinks. Once begun, calibration can be interrupted as desired.

• If the CAL button is not pressed while the calibration lamp is blinking, nor-

mal charging will begin after about ten seconds.

• To interrupt calibration, press the calibration button again. Calibration will

end and charging will begin.

Troubleshooting

• If the lamps blink when no battery is inserted: the MH-21 has malfunctioned. Unplug

the charger immediately and contact a Nikon service representative.

• If the calibration and charge lamps all ﬂash at once when a battery is inserted: a

problem occurred during charging. Remove the battery and unplug the charger im-

mediately, then contact a Nikon service representative.

267

Precautions for Use: Quick Charger

• The Nikon MH-21 is for use with Nikon EN-EL4/EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion

batteries only. Do not attempt to recharge other batteries with the MH-21.

• Do not use this product with non-compatible batteries.

• Remove the power cable from the power outlet when not in use.

• Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the charger, unplug it, tak-

ing care to avoid burns. Take the charger to a Nikon representative for inspection.

Precautions for Use: Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries

• After removing the battery from the camera for storage or transportation, be

sure to attach the terminal cover included with the EN-EL4a. Shorting the bat-

tery could result in leakage, ﬁre explosion, or other damage to the battery.

• Do not connect the product to any device not speciﬁcally referred to in this manual.

• Before using the product for the ﬁrst time or after an extended period of disuse,

recharge the battery with the MH-21 Quick Charger.

• If the battery will not be used for some time, run the battery ﬂat before putting it away.

• When storing the battery for long periods, charge it and then run it ﬂat again at least

once a year.

• Always remove the battery from the camera or battery charger when not in use. If

the battery is left in place, minute amounts of current will continue to ﬂow even

when the battery is not use, and the battery may be drained to the point that it will

no longer function.

• When the battery is not in use, attach the terminal cover and store the battery in a

dry location with an ambient temperature of 15–25°C (59–77°F). Do not leave the

battery in hot or extremely cold places.

• During recharging, the ambient temperature should be between 0–40°C (32–104°F)

or the battery may not fully charge or may not function properly.

• Do not attempt to recharge a fully-charged battery. Failure to observe this precaution

will result in reduced battery performance.

• You may notice that the battery is hot directly after use or recharging; this does not

indicate a malfunction.

• Even when fully charged, the battery will discharge more rapidly in cold conditions.

It is recommended that you keep a fully-charged, spare battery on hand.

• Check the camera battery level indicator regularly. If the battery requires calibration,

calibrate the battery using the MH-21 Quick Charger.

• A marked drop in the time a fully-charged battery retains its charge at room tempera-

ture indicates a drop in battery performance. Check battery performance indicator

using the Battery Info option in the camera setup menu. When the camera shows

that battery performance is at its lowest level, the battery has reached the end of its

working life and needs to be replaced. Purchase a new EN-EL4a battery.

• The charge state shown in the camera battery level indicator is affected by ambient

temperature and other external conditions.

268

Speciﬁcations

MH-21 Quick Charger

Rated input

AC 100–240V (50/60Hz)

Charging output

Supported batteries

Charging time^*

DC 12.6V/1200mA

Nikon EN-EL4/EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion batteries

• EN-EL4a: 145 minutes

• EN-EL4: 100 minutes

Operating temperature 0–40°C (+32–104°F)

Dimensions (W×H×D) Approximately 135mm×54.5mm×85mm (5.3×2.1×3.3 in.)

Length of cord

Weight

Approximately 1800 mm (70.8 in.)

Approximately 225g (7.9oz), excluding power cable

Approximate charging time when battery is fully discharged.

EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion battery

Type

Rated capacity

Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

11.1V/2500 mAh

Dimensions (W×H×D) Approximately 56.5mm×27mm×82.5mm (2.2×1.1×3.2in.)

Weight Approximately 180g (6.3 oz), excluding terminal cover

Nikon will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain. The appearance

of this product and its speciﬁcations are subject to change without notice.

269

Battery Life

The number of shots that can be taken with an EN-EL4a battery varies with the con-

dition of the battery, temperature, and how the camera is used.

Case 1

At room temperature (20°C/68°F), approximately 3800 shots can be taken with a

fully-charged (2500mAh) EN-EL4a battery and an AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G IF ED

lens (VR off) under the following standard Nikon test conditions: continuous high-

speed shooting mode; high-speed crop mode off; continuous-servo autofocus; image

quality set to JPEG Normal; image size set to Large; shutter speed ½50 s; shutter-release

pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from inﬁnity to minimum range

three times; after six shots, monitor turned on for ﬁve seconds and then turned off;

cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off.

Case 2

At room temperature (20°C/68°F), approximately 1150 shots can be taken with a

fully-charged (2500mAh) EN-EL4a battery and an AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G

IF ED lens (VR off) under the following standard Nikon test conditions: single-frame

shooting mode; high-speed crop mode off; single-servo autofocus; image quality set

to JPEG Normal; image size set to Large; shutter speed ½50 s; shutter-release pressed

halfway for six seconds and focus cycled from inﬁnity to minimum range once with

each shot; after each shot, monitor turned on for two seconds and then turned off;

cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off.

The following can reduce battery life:

• Using the monitor

• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway

• Repeated autofocus operations

• Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs

• Slow shutter speeds

• Using optional WT-2/2A or WT-1/1A wireless transmitters

To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL4a batteries:

• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.

• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left un-

used.

270

Index

Menus

PLAYBACK MENU (156–167)

Delete, 156–157

a3: Group dynamic AF,

186–187

a4: Lock-on, 188

a5: AF activation, 188

a6: Focus area illum, 189

a7: Focus area, 190

a8: Vertical AF-ON, 190

b1: ISO auto, 191

b2: ISO step value, 192

b3: EV step, 192

b4: Exposure comp. EV,

193

b5: Exposure comp., 193

b6: Center weight, 194

b7: Fine-tune exposure,

194

f6: Command dials,

210–211

f7: Buttons and dials, 212

f8: No CF card?, 212

SET UP (213–232)

Format, 214

LCD brightness, 215

Mirror lock-up, 215

Video mode, 216

World time, 18

Playback folder, 158

Slide show, 159–160

Hide image, 161–162

Print set, 163–165

Display mode, 166

Image review, 166

After delete, 167

Rotate tall, 167

Language, 17

SHOOTING MENU (168–178)

Shooting menu bank,

169–170

Image comment, 217

Auto image rotation, 218

Recent settings, 219

Voice memo, 150

Voice memo overwrite,

151

Voice memo button, 151

Audio output, 153

USB, 220

Dust off ref photo,

221–222

Battery info, 223

Wireless LAN, 223–231

Image authentication,

231

Reset shooting menu, 171

Active folder, 172

File naming, 173

Image quality, 45–46

Image size, 48–49

Hi-speed Crop, 41–42

JPEG compression, 47

RAW compression, 48

White balance, 55–67

Long exp. NR, 175

High ISO NR, 176

ISO sensitivity, 52–53

Image sharpening, 68

Tone compensation, 69

Color space, 70

c1: AE lock, 195

c2: AE-L/AF-L, 195

c3: Auto meter-off, 196

c4: Self-timer, 196

c5: Monitor off, 196

d1: Shooting speed, 197

d2: Maximum shots, 197

d3: Exp. delay mode, 198

d4: File No. Seq., 199

d5: Cntrl panel/ﬁnder,

199–200

d6: Illumination, 200

e1: Flash sync speed, 201

e2: Flash shutter speed,

201

e3: AA ﬂash mode, 202

e4: Modeling ﬂash, 202

e5: Auto BKT set, 203

e6: Manual mode bkting,

204

e7: Auto BKT Order, 204

e8: Auto BKT selection,

205

f1: Center button, 205–206

f2: Multi selector, 207

f3: Photo info/playback,

207

f4: FUNC. button, 208

f5: FUNC. + command,

209

Save/load settings, 232

Firmware version, 232

Symbols

3D color matrix metering II.

See Metering

3D Multi Sensor Balanced Fill-

Flash for Digital SLR, 110

Color mode, 72

Hue adjustment, 73

Image overlay, 118–119

Multiple exposure,

120–122

Trim, 123–124

Intvl timer shooting,

125–129

Advanced Wireless Lighting, 109

AF-area mode, 78

Aperture, 87–96

adjusting, 92

lock, 96

Non-CPU lens data,

131–134

CSM MENU (179–212)

C: Bank select, 182

R: Menu reset, 183–184

a1: AF-C mode priority,

185

maximum, 86, 93, 95, 108,

110, 131

minimum, 20, 87

non-CPU lenses and, 131

value display, 7, 11

Ambient light sensor, 55, 60

Auto meter off, 196

Autoexposure lock, 97

a2: AF-S mode priority,

185

271

Autofocus, 78

CPU lenses, 20, 244–246

Creative Lighting System, 108

Custom Settings, 179

defaults, 183

Flash, 108–116. See also

Speedlight

bracketing, 100

Flash Color Information Com-

munication, 55

continuous-servo, 74

focus tracking, 74

single-area AF, 79

single-servo, 74

menu banks, 182

Auto FP high-speed sync,

109, 249

A/V OUT, 153, 234

CSM. See CSM MENU;

Custom Settings

Flash-ready indicator, 116

Flash sync mode, 112

Flexible program, 89. See

also Exposure mode, pro-

grammed auto

Focal plane mark, 3, 85

Focus. See autofocus; focus

mode; manual focus

Focus area (focus brackets),

10, 76–81

Daylight saving time, 18

DCF version 2.0. See Design

rule for Camera File system

Deleting, 35, 146, 156–157.